JP2022186867A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a novel game content.

SOLUTION: A VDP 205, on the basis of a drawing instruction from a display CPU 201, performs geometry calculation including an arrangement process of image data to a world coordinate system and performs rendering including a projection process to a projection plane, thereby creating drawing data that is two-dimensional data. A signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to a pattern display device 41, thereby allowing an image corresponding to the drawing data to be displayed in the pattern display device 41. In this case, when time of an RTC 65 is the one corresponding to a start trigger of a time correspondence performance, the time correspondence performance starts. When the time correspondence performance starts, a preparation period occurs first. When the preparation period elapses, a special period occurs in which the display content of the image in the pattern display device 41 is more brilliant than that in the preparation period.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides display means having a display unit,
display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means includes simultaneous display control means for simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit,
The gaming machine includes first mode determination information in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image. Information for determining the second mode set in chronological order, and information storage means for storing in advance,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and The display mode of the second type image is determined according to the information for determining the second mode.

According to the present invention, display control can be preferably performed.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot occurrence lottery or the like. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device; It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a preliminary lottery table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a reach lottery table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a sound and light side RAM. It is an explanatory diagram for. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control pattern table; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is oscillatingly displayed on the pattern display device, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is confirmed and displayed on the pattern display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various parts tables. (a1) to (a3), (b1) to (b3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. (a) to (e2) are time charts showing how an effect for a game cycle is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; (a) to (f) are time charts showing an example of a variable display mode of symbols. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work RAM; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for an acceleration period, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first high speed period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for the first low speed period; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the values set in the first adjustment counter and the third adjustment counter and the types of symbols; (b) the value set in the second adjustment counter; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the types of symbols. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for an acceleration period, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first high speed period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for the first low speed period; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed by a display CPU; 4 is a flow chart showing normal fluctuation calculation processing executed by a display CPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of loop display production|presentation. (a) to (d) are time charts showing the flow of loop display effects. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work RAM; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a character staying table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a character moving table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a background table. 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a character loop executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for background loops performed by display CPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of group display production|presentation. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data for group display; (a1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between the image update cycle and the cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) are drawn in the drawing target frame area in the same decoded image data. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the ranges to be changed are changed; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for group display effect executed by the display CPU; FIG. 4(a) is a flowchart showing decoding processing executed by a video decoder, and (b) is a flowchart showing group display setting processing executed by VDP. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the effective period display effect|presentation. (a), (b) is a time chart showing a comparative example of effective period display effect. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a band display table; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a blinking display table; (a1), (b1), (a2), and (b2) are time charts showing how the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table and the flashing display table. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for an effective period display performed by display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the number display effect. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing number display effect. It is a front view of the said inner frame which expands and shows the lower side area|region of an inner frame. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing counting processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing output setting processing of a measurement command executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a measurement command response process executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a measurement display performed by display CPU. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how the number display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for an increase display performed by display CPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first character image, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect image, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second character image. . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the range to be drawn in the frame area to be drawn is changed in each image data; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo moving image table; FIG. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how a pseudo moving image effect is executed. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image effect executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for round production|presentation performed by display CPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining another example of the pseudo moving image effect. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing; (a) to (c) are time charts showing how time-based effects are executed. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the normal period, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period, and (c) during the special period. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a display of a pattern display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how time-based effects are executed in relation to the execution status of effects for game rounds. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound and light side ROM, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data table for time-based effects. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RTC-compatible processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for starting a preparatory period, which is executed by the MPU on the sound and light side; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed by a display CPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing during the preparation period executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing during a special period executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period; FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of setting processing for starting the preparation period executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing another example of command response processing executed by the display CPU; FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of setting processing during the preparation period executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of another preservation|save effect. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a comparative example of another save effect. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how different save effects are performed. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the specific contents of another save effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for another preservation|save effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the operation effective period performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during operation corresponding production|presentation performed by display CPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for separate storage display executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing data creation processing for separately saved display executed in VDP; FIG. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific display content of an angle display effect. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. (a) to (i) are explanatory diagrams for explaining various moving image data groups. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the angle display effect progresses. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for angle display effects executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the process for openings performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing decoding processing executed in VDP; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a moving image correspondence table corresponding to the A angle, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a switching reference table. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing for angle display effect executed in VDP; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of normal moving image data, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of special moving image data. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a special moving image use effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for special moving image use effects performed by display CPU. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing setting processing for a special moving image use effect executed in VDP; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. - 特許庁FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball shooting mechanism shoots game balls by manually operating a shooting operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 .

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or when a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , when a ball enters the general prize winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display part 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁In the special figure display part 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a jackpot occurrence lottery with the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, as a result of stopping after the variable display of the pattern is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the big win generation lottery is performed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special symbol display part 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed according to it. will be That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game turn in which the result of the jackpot generating lottery is the jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are displayed stopped on the activated line set in advance in the symbol display device 41 .

The display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the pattern display device 41, and FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) are the display surfaces of the pattern display device 41. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing P;

As shown in FIGS. 3( a ) to 3 ( j ), the patterns, which are one type of pattern, include nine main patterns with numbers “1” to “9”, and shell-shaped patterns. It is composed of a sub pattern consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, ie upper, middle and lower rows, are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It's like Also, five effective lines are set on the display surface P, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a normal big win result or a 15R probability variable big win result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are attached. The main pattern corresponds to the "non-specific pattern". When a 15R probability variable jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols or a combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result to be described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, A demonstration video is displayed.

The pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a jackpot is won in a jackpot generation lottery based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or winning a prize in the second operating port 34, it is possible to win a prize to the special electric prize winning device 32. switch to the open/close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 44 is provided above the window portion 42 . A pair of left and right speaker units 45 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 that bulge forward are arranged vertically below the window portion 42 . An upper plate 46a which opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a which likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a.

In the area of the lower bulging portion 47 outside the lower plate 47a, a performance operation device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the operation device 48 for performance is manually operated by the player to set the content of the performance on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 or the like to the content of the predetermined performance.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 . In addition, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power source/fire control device. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, the board box housing the main control board 51 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. can be As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51 . The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power/launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . The power/emission control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 which will be described later.

A blackout monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power/launch control device 57 . In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is sent to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It becomes possible to

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . As a part of the various sensors, detection provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning ball entry part such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the through gate 35 A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot generation lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and executes a reach generation lottery and a variable display time determination lottery for each game round. do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display setting of the special figure display section 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging jackpot types such as 15R probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results, A reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the pattern display device 41 fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, a special figure display unit 37a and a pattern display device 41 and a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in . Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric role release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the electric role open state. These counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 54b as an acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in

The reserved storage area 54b comprises a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of →third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. . It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and at the start of one game round is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored in the ROM 53 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34.

As a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the winning of the large winning opening is completed. Continue until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the large winning opening. This continues until there are 6 of them.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the large winning opening is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of openings and closings of the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value and may be any value as long as the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set larger good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is substantially configured not to win. should be For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the limited number of openings is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, for one opening, It is also possible to set the product of the game ball launch cycle and the number of opening limits to be longer than the opening limit time. Also, even if the shooting interval of the game ball and the opening time of the big winning hole at one time are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is actually awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 .

As the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the normal operation of the second operating port 34 A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric device 34a being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role open lottery using the general electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 ), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric role 34a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. is set for a long time. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the general electric role item 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time required for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, the time secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 35 In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than the low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time secured when the next electric accessory open lottery is performed after one electric accessory open lottery is performed (that is, , Shorten one time fluctuation display time in the normal figure display unit 38a), shorten the average time of the securing time and increase the winning probability, apply any one condition or any combination of conditions , the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is that the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result of the big-hit generation lottery results in winning the big-hit state and the state shifts to the big-hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot state.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result of the big-hit generation lottery results in winning the big-hit state and the state shifts to the big-hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variable jackpot state.

In relation to each game state, the normal game state means a state in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the normal jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot results. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is set as the probability variable jackpot result, the aspect of the probability variable jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of variable probability jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, and the opening and closing execution. Although the low-frequency winning mode is the mode, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, is the lowest in the support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, as a type of probability variable jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained as it was before. Different implicit 2R probability variable jackpot outcomes may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variable jackpot results is achieved.

Furthermore, as a kind of loss result in the jackpot occurrence lottery, there is a special loss result in which transition to the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and transition to the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode do not occur after the transition to the open/close execution mode. good too. In the configuration in which both the non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special loss result as described above are set, the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, the transition mode of the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is different, for example, in the normal game state, when one of the non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result or the special loss result occurs, It becomes possible for the player to predict which outcome it actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is that the symbol display device 41 is equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of variable display of symbols, and in the game round when the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is a special display. In the resulting game machine, in the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result. Refers to the display state for

There are two types of expected effects, namely, the ready-to-win effect and an announcement effect for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect and the special display result in the stage before the ready-to-win effect occurs.

In the ready-to-win performance, a combination of jackpot patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is achieved by stopping and displaying the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern strings displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加A display state is included in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols with which there is a possibility of being established is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform a ready-to-win effect. , a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, for the ready-to-win effect, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset effective line within the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying a combination of ready-to-win patterns having a possibility of establishing a combination, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 4 will be described. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols having the same number on the lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. It becomes a reach performance by being beaten. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

In the advance notice effect, after the symbols are variably displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some of the symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background image in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice effect can occur in any game round when the ready-to-win effect is performed and when the ready-to-win effect is not performed, but the price when the ready-to-win effect is performed is higher than when the ready-to-win effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win effect is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in the game times when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, in the game rounds in which the open/close execution mode is not entered, the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 is referenced, and the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach performance. is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the announcement effect is made not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission control device 60 .

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used for determining the variation display time in the special figure display section 37a and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU52. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

For example, the universal electronic accessory release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected with a payout control device 55 and a power supply/launch control device 57 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 50 . A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply/launch control device 57 based on the operation of the launch operation device 28 . The power/shooting control device 57 drives the game ball shooting mechanism 58 based on the shooting permission command received from the main controller 50 to shoot the game ball toward the game area PA.

In addition, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU52, and the display control of these special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is directly performed by the MPU52. In other words, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed in the MPU 52 at each game round. Moreover, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is to be specified, the MPU 52 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34. . In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the driving control of the special electric winning driving section so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electrical role 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the general electrical role driving unit so that the general electrical role 34a is opened and closed. Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to an audio emission control device 60, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60. FIG.

Here, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is set to "1". determine whether In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. At step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current game state. do.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). First, in step S201, power failure information storage processing is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information was executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric prize driving unit is set, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electrical role drive unit is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not there is a winning to the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 Execute the process to identify the .

In the following step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, as already explained, one game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec.

In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and open confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed.

In the following step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, The numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point is stored as pending information in the pending storage area 54b in chronological order. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the reservation information is not during the game rotation and the opening and closing execution mode and the reservation information is stored, it is determined whether the reservation information corresponds to the jackpot winning. A lottery process and a distribution determination process for determining to which jackpot result the reserved information corresponds when it corresponds to the winning of the jackpot are executed. In addition, in the special special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, but also if the reservation information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether the reservation information corresponds to the reach occurrence Along with executing a reach determination process for determining , a process for selecting the variation display time of the game round is performed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variation display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variation display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing are used for this time. Determines the variable display time of game rounds. Then, a variation command including information on the variation display time of the determined game round and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. - 特許庁Also, the MPU 52 starts measuring the variable display time when it transmits the variable command and the type command.

In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variation display time corresponding to the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round, the special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot occurrence lottery process and distribution of the game round this time A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is maintained over the fixed display time. When the fixed display time elapses, if the current game round corresponds to the loss result, a new game round is started under the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute the process. If the hold information is not stored, it waits until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the game round this time corresponds to the big win result, the processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of starting, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 . Moreover, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the jackpot generation lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode and the support mode are set. process. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period occurs over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect is executed in which the player can recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred during the opening period. After that, a round game in which opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. After the round game is executed a predetermined number of times, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode will end during the ending period. .

After performing the special figure special electric control processing of step S213 in timer interrupt processing, the general figure general electric control processing is performed in step S214. In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 is generated, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general map side is stored Then, open determination is performed for the reservation information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the step S213 and step S214 immediately before, set the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b. At the same time, output information is set for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information corresponding to the normal diagram display section 38a in the normal diagram reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. Also, in step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60 has a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted, as shown in FIG. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 63, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the main control device 50 and the effect operating device 48 . The display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72, which will be described later, of the display control device 70 is connected.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

The display CPU 72 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected via a bus to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 , and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77 . be done. Note that receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the sound emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. be

The display CPU 72 is connected to a work RAM 73, a memory module 74 and a VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Give transfer instructions. Also, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, instructs the pattern display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, work RAM 73, VRAM 75 and VDP 76 will be described below.

The memory module 74 prestores control data including control programs and fixed value data, and includes sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, background data, moving image data, and the like. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writeable read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. there is The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described later in detail.

The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 . Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 41 . The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 has an expansion buffer 81 . Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74 . The VRAM 75 is also provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76 . Note that the VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76 .

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws data on the pattern display device 41 based on drawing instructions from the display CPU 72, using data stored in the expansion buffer 81, specifically by processing the data. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the pattern display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 76 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control section 91 , a register 92 , a video decoder 93 and a display circuit 94 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I/F 96 for the VRAM 75 .

The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 . By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that all of the control programs for the operation of the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list. may be configured such that the control unit 91 executes a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . Also, the control unit 91 uses (or processes) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 81 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 . Drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 41. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is executed. That is, the frame buffer 82 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b. It is output to the pattern display device 41 through the connected output port 78 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 94 from the frame regions 82a and 82b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 41 is generated and output. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. The video decoder 93 also decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 .

<Processing configuration of MPU 62 of sound emission control device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound and light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 62 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, table setting processing for setting a control table used for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and control of the display control device 70 is executed. do. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table is set for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main side MPU 52). In subsequent step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 about the content of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301.

After that, in step S303, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting section 44 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Further, in step S304, sound output control processing for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the current pointer information in the control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting processing>
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If the command for variation and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the information indicating the result of the jackpot generation lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game cycle is specified, The specified information is written in RAM 64 .

After that, on the condition that the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the variable display time corresponding to the possible occurrence of the preliminary announcement effect (step S403: YES), the preliminary announcement lottery process is executed. (Step S404). In the advance notice lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 41 is to perform the advance notice effect in the current game round. As described above, such an advance notice effect is performed in a situation where the symbols are displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 41 starts to variably display the symbols, or in some cases. In a situation in which symbols are displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is changed from the previous aspect. Also includes those in which the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are different from the patterns up to that point. The advance notice effect can occur in any game round when the ready-to-win effect is performed and when the ready-to-win effect is not performed, but it is higher when the ready-to-win effect is performed than when the ready-to-win effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to one of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the result of losing, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot results have a lower appearance rate. is set to occur more easily.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 pre-stored in the ROM 63 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as sound and light side ROM 63) is stored in the RAM 64 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereafter referred to as sound and light side RAM 64). read out. The advance notice lottery table T1 is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Therefore, in the announcement lottery process, the announcement lottery table T1 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 .

FIG. 11(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the preliminary lottery table T1. The advance lottery result and the numerical range of the advance lottery counter are associated with each other in the advance lottery table T1. As the results of the advance notice lottery, non-occurrence of the advance notice effect not occurring, a first notice effect in which the notice effect is executed in the first mode, and a second notice effect in which the notice effect is executed in the second mode are set. . In the first notice effect, for example, an individual image for the first notice effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the second notice effect, for example, the individual image for the second notice effect is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. The announcement lottery counter is provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 . The notice lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239". return. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the advance lottery table T1, possible values of the advance lottery counter are assigned to any of the advance lottery results.

It should be noted that, depending on the type of the advance notice lottery table T1, the type of advance notice effect to be the lottery target may differ. In this case, there are cases where the selection rate of the advance notice effect to be selected is different between the different types of advance notice lottery tables T1 even though the type of notice effect to be the lottery target is the same. In some cases, part or all of the types of advance notice effects to be selected by lottery are different.

In the advance notice lottery process, the current value of the advance notice lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is checked against the advance notice lottery table T1 read this time. Then, the result of the advance notice lottery corresponding to the value obtained from the counter for advance notice lottery is acquired as the result of the present advance notice lottery process.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S403 or when the process of step S404 is executed, the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is reached. On the condition that it is the variable display time corresponding to the generation of the effect (step S405: YES), the ready-to-win effect lottery process is executed (step S406). That is, when the variable display time of the game round determined by the main MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, the type of the ready-to-win effect to be executed is determined in the ready-to-win effect lottery process, and the main MPU 52 When the variable display time of the game round determined by does not correspond to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win effect lottery process is not executed.

In the ready-to-win effect, as already described, some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 are stopped and displayed to cope with the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode. The display state includes a display state in which a combination of ready-to-win patterns with a possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot patterns is displayed, and in that state, patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining pattern rows. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform a ready-to-win effect. , a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a ready-to-win effect. The ready-to-win effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the result of losing, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot results have a low reach effect. It's set up to make it easier.

In the ready-to-win effect lottery process, the ready-to-win lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 63 is read out to the sound and light side RAM 64. - 特許庁The ready-to-win lottery table T2 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Therefore, in the ready-to-win effect lottery process, the ready-to-win lottery table T2 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 .

FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. The ready-to-win lottery result and the numerical range of the ready-to-win lottery counter are associated with each other in the ready-to-win lottery table T2. As a result of the ready-to-reach lottery, a first ready-to-reach effect in which the ready-to-reach effect is executed in the first mode, a second ready-to-reach effect in which the ready-to-reach effect is performed in the second mode, and a third ready-to-reach effect in which the ready-to-reach effect is performed in the third mode. Directed and set. In the first ready-to-win production, for example, an individual image for the first ready-to-win production is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the second ready-to-win production, for example, the individual image for the second ready-to-win production is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate, and in the third ready-to-win effect, for example, an individual image for the third ready-to-win effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 . The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239". return. As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the ready-to-win lottery table T2, possible values of the ready-to-win lottery counter are assigned to any of the ready-to-win lottery results.

It should be noted that the type of ready-to-win effect to be selected by lottery may differ depending on the type of the ready-to-win lottery table T2. In this case, the ready-to-win lottery table T2 of different types may have the same type of ready-to-win effect as the lottery target, but the selectivity of the ready-to-win effect may differ. In some cases, some or all of the types of ready-to-win effects that are subject to lottery are different.

In the ready-to-win effect lottery process, the value of the ready-to-win lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the acquired value is checked against the ready-to-win lottery table T2 read this time. Then, the ready-to-win lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the ready-to-win lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current ready-to-win effect lottery process.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S405, or when the process of step S406 is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to the stop result that the same pattern combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. This information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result. The active lines L1 to L5 on which the same combination of symbols are stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, even if the result is a normal jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols may be selected.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the activated line L1 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a specific combination of symbols (“3, 4, 1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a loss result, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect is specified from the content of the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, when the ready-to-win effect occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not materialize on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the ready-to-win effect on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as information of the current stop result.

After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, the result of the notice lottery process (step S404), the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, the result of the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) when the ready-to-win effect occurs, and the stop symbol determination process ( A control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound and light side RAM 64. FIG.

The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the control pattern table T3 that can be set when the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the game round resulting in the 15R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the control pattern table T3, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game round is set. and information on the presence or absence of command output are set.

The task content information is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game round, and the display light emitting unit 44 emits light in a manner corresponding to the task content information in each frame. As control is performed, sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, the pointer information "0" is set with the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information "200" is set with the data at the start of the notice effect. , data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", data at the start of the normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and data at the start of the super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". The pointer information of "1000" is set with the data at the start of the fixed effect, and the pointer information of "1400" is set with the data at the start of the standby display. Each of these pieces of pointer information corresponds to delimitation timings such as the start of the presentation, the switching of the presentation, and the end of the presentation. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings is set in pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence/absence of command output is information indicating the presence/absence of command output from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the contents of the image on the pattern display device 41 and the light emission from the display light emitting unit 44 are displayed. It is possible to associate the content with the content of sound output from the speaker unit 45 . That is, in accordance with the content of the moving image on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting section 44 performs light production, and the speaker section 45 performs sound output production. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the contents of the task. Therefore, when the game cycle starts to fluctuate, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 . In addition, in the contents of the task, the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the fixed effect, and the data at the start of the standby display are each set Pointer information Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", and "1400". Therefore, within the range of the effect for the game cycle, which is started by the occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity that the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect categories included in the effect for the game cycle When the type changes, based on command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, the display CPU 72 starts display control corresponding to the new effect division.

Note that the control pattern table T3 includes, in addition to the effects for the game cycle, the effects for the opening/closing execution mode, and the effects for the demo display in a situation where neither the effects for the game times nor the effects for the opening/closing execution mode are executed. It is provided to correspond to Since the control pattern table T3 is set to correspond to various situations in this manner, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the sound and light RAM 64 in a situation where operating power is supplied to the sound and light side MPU 62. It is in a state of

After that, determination processing of the variable display time is executed (step S409). In this process, the variable display time information for the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variable command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the specified variable display time information is sent to the description of FIG. 11(c). As shown in the figure, it is set in the variable time counter 64a provided in the sound and light side RAM 64. FIG. The variable time counter 64a is a counter for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify the timing of ending the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and starting the fixed display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter 64a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started in the sound and light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

The variable display mode of the symbols when the effect for the game round is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b). FIG. 13(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is oscillatingly displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 13(b) is for explaining how a pattern is confirmed and displayed on the pattern display device 41. It is an explanatory diagram for.

A game cycle that results in a complete loss (a game cycle that results in a loss without the occurrence of a reach effect) or a normal reach display (a reach effect is performed using the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying the character for reach effect) In the game cycle in which the display content to be performed) is performed, the variable display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the high speed variation display which is the low identification mode, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a predetermined order. At the same time as switching to the low-speed fluctuation display, which is a high identification mode, the standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. After the state in which the standby display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 continues for a predetermined period, each symbol that has been standby displayed is confirmed and displayed as the final stop display, and the confirmed display state is confirmed. continues over time.

The standby display means, as shown in FIG. 13(a), standby areas SA1 to SA1 which are virtually set on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 so that each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has three symbols. It is a display state in which a pattern is waiting in SA9. In a state in which only the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed on standby and the remaining pattern rows Z2 and Z3 continue to scroll the patterns, one pattern is waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper pattern row Z1. It will be in the state of being In addition, in a state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed on standby and the scroll display of the symbols is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 are displayed. , one pattern is waiting in each of the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to . Further, in a state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on standby, one symbol is waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1-SA9 are not displayed statically, but are variably displayed within the same standby areas SA1-SA9. Specifically, each pattern to be displayed on standby is swayed up and down or left and right within a range including the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9 and sandwiching the stop position. move.

Confirmation display means that, as shown in FIG. 13(b), each of the symbols that have been standby-displayed in the standby areas SA1-SA9 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are displayed in the corresponding standby areas SA1-SA9. This is a display state in which the variable display within the range is finished and the corresponding symbols are stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. By performing the confirmation display in this way, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize the stop result of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round.

On the other hand, in the game cycle in which the super ready-to-win display is performed, the variable display of the symbols is started, and the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, which are part of the symbol rows, are displayed in the waiting areas SA1 to SA3 and SA7 to SA9. , and after the reach line is formed, an image for super reach is displayed. After that, in a state in which a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of winning reach symbols is formed, symbols are displayed in a standby state in each standby area on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined period. Then, those symbols are confirmed and displayed, and the confirmed display state is continued for the confirmation display time.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), in a situation where production execution control is being performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), sound and light side in step S409 When the value of the variable time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is "0" (step S411: YES), the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is displayed in the fixed time counter 64b provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 ) is set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started in the sound and light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses. Further, the confirmation display table that determines the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 during the confirmation display time is read from the sound and light ROM 63 and stored in the sound and light RAM 64 (step S413). Control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the fixed display time is set in the fixed display table. The section 45 is in a mute state. After that, a fixed display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). As a result, the display CPU 72 confirms and displays each symbol waiting and displayed on the symbol display device 41 as it is, and maintains the confirmed display state for the confirmation display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to be displayed.

Here, in the main MPU 52, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command has elapsed, the special figure display unit 37a corresponds to the result of the jackpot generation lottery process and the distribution determination process of this game time. to display the stop result and maintain that state for the fixed display time. The variable display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the same as the variable display time set in step S409 in the sound and light MPU 62, and the fixed display time measured by the main MPU 52 is This is the same as the fixed display time set in step S412. Therefore, when the main MPU 52 confirms that the variable display time has passed, the pattern display device 41 starts to confirm the display of the pattern, and when the main MPU 52 confirms that the fixed display time has passed, the pattern display device. At 41, the confirmation display of the pattern is finished.

In the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S415 in addition to the above processes. In other processing, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 52, a control pattern table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect is read, and when an ending command is received from the main MPU 52, executes processing for ending the effect for the open/close execution mode. In addition, in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display effect is read.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound and light side MPU 62 executes the notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence or absence of the notice effect and the contents thereof, and the ready-to-win effect lottery for determining the contents of the ready-to-win effect. Processing (step S406) is executed. As a result, there is no need for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence and content of the notice effect, and furthermore, there is no need to determine the content of the ready-to-win effect, thereby reducing the processing load of the main MPU 52 regarding execution control of the effect for game rounds. It becomes possible to

However, due to the fact that both the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are determined by lottery in the sound and light side MPU 62, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected by the sound and light side MPU 62 is given to the main side MPU 52. may not match the variable display time determined by In other words, if the lottery for the advance notice effect and the lottery for the ready-to-win effect are to be executed while completely matching the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52 is made to correspond. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In this case, the types of advance notice effects and the types of ready-to-win effects become enormous. Further, even if a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects are prepared in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to each variable display time that can be determined by the main side MPU 52, the main side MPU 52 If the lottery for the advance notice effect and the lottery for the ready-to-win effect are to be executed while perfectly matching the determined variable display time, there will be restrictions on the design of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, while permitting that the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 does not coincide with the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the pachinko machine 10 stands by at the end of the performance for the game round. The configuration is such that display and confirmation display are performed satisfactorily. The configuration will be described below.

14(a) and 14(b) show various parts tables T4 to T4 used when setting the control pattern table T3 in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10). It is an explanatory view for explaining T9.

The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are stored in the sound and light side ROM 63 in advance. The parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one parts table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3. One control pattern table T3 may be generated by combining the read parts tables.

As the table group, there are a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. In the table group TG1 for the first period, the variable display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in the game round effect. In the case where the part table corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3 and all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to the standby display at the same time in the effect for the game round A parts table corresponding to the entire duration of the presentation for the game round is included. When the notice effect is executed as the effect for the game round, the control data for executing the notice effect are set in the parts tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, the control data for executing the first notice effect is set in the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and the control data for executing the second notice effect is set in the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. is set. Further, the control data corresponding to the period until the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3 of the game round when the advance notice effect does not occur is set in the parts table T4 for the notice effect non-occurrence. The table group TG1 for the first period includes part tables other than the part tables T4 to T6 illustrated above.

In the table group TG2 for the second period, the variable display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in the game round effect. A parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3 to the end of the standby display in the middle symbol row Z2 is included. When the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game-time effect, the control data for executing the ready-to-win effect is set in the parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first reach effect is set in the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and the control data for executing the second reach effect is set in the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. Control data for executing the third reach effect is set in the parts table T9 for the third reach effect. The table group TG2 for the second period includes part tables other than the part tables T7 to T9 illustrated above. The parts table also includes a parts table when the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

In the setting processing of the control pattern table in step S408 of the table setting processing (FIG. 10), one parts table is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the ROM 63 on the sound and light side. In this case, for example, it is a game round that results in a loss and is a game round that is started when the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 54b is four, which is the upper limit number. When the variable display time of the game cycle corresponds to the variable display time in which the switching of the variable display of symbols from scroll display to standby display occurs simultaneously in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the table for the first period. One parts table read from the group TG1 is set as it is as the control pattern table T3.

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the current game round corresponds to the variable display time that occurs sequentially in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the switching of the variable display of the symbols to the standby display corresponds to the advance lottery processing (step One parts table corresponding to the result of S404) is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound and light side ROM 63 . In addition, if it is a game round in which the ready-to-win effect does not occur, one parts table corresponding to the current variable display time is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound and light side ROM 63, and the game round in which the ready-to-win effect occurs. If so, one parts table corresponding to the result of the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S405) is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound and light side ROM 63 . By combining the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period, one control pattern table T3 is set.

In a situation where one parts table is directly set as one control pattern table T3, the type of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. will exist. For example, the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a), and the reach effect lottery process is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. In the situation where (step S406) is executed, the parts table T4 for not generating the advance notice effect, the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and the parts table T5 for the second notice effect are selected from the table group TG1 for the first period. One of the tables T6 is selected, and the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect, the part table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect, and the part table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. Either is selected.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15(a1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for not generating the advance notice effect, and FIG. 15(a2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect. (a3) indicates the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second advance notice effect. Also, FIG. 15(b1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect, FIG. 15(b2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect, FIG. 15(b3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a1) to 15(a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for non-generating notice effect. (Ta1) longer, and the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second advance notice effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect by the time (Ta2-Ta1). Further, as shown in FIGS. 15(b1) to 15(b3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect. is longer by the time (Tb1), and the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect is longer by the time (Tb2-Tb1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect.

In the above configuration, the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance lottery table T1 shown in FIG. When the process (step S406) is executed, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table will vary according to the combination of the parts tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, when the combination of the parts table T4 for not generating the advance notice effect and the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect is selected, the variable display time is the shortest, and the parts table T6 for the second notice effect is selected. The variable display time is the longest when the combination with the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is selected, but the difference between these variable display times is (Ta2+Tb2). Therefore, the variation display time determined by the sound and light side MPU 62 can be different for one variation command transmitted from the master side MPU 52 .

However, the longest variation display time among the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is less than or equal to the variation display time corresponding to the variation command, that is, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. The advance lottery table T1 and the ready-to-win lottery table T2 are set so as to be selected with respect to the combination of the variation command and the type command. That is, no matter which advance lottery table T1 is used and which reach lottery table T2 is used, the control pattern table is created by combining a plurality of part tables. The variable display time is less than or equal to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 .

In a configuration in which the longest variation display time among the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is equal to or less than the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the variation time counter of the sound and light side RAM 64 The control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variable display time measured using 64a elapses. On the other hand, if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. It is configured so that the standby display is continued. Processing for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

In the pointer update process, 1 is added to the value of the pointer information to be referenced among the pointer information used when specifying the control data to be used in the currently set control table (eg, control pattern table). (Step S501). As a result, in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the value of the pointer information updated this time is used. Corresponding control data are used.

After that, on the condition that the value of the pointer information to be referenced is greater than the value of the final pointer defined in the control table, and that the currently set control table is a control pattern table for game rounds. (Steps S502 and S503: YES), pointer information correction processing is executed (step S504). In the pointer information correction process, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started is changed to the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S302), and the light emission control process (step S302) in the next process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The value of the pointer information to be referenced is corrected so as to be used in step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). As a result, even if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the standby display continues until the variable display time elapses. It will happen.

Further, when the pointer information correction processing (step S504) is executed, a standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets a data table for continuing the standby display so that the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41 .

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 17, a description will be given of how the effect for the game cycle is executed. 17(a) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIGS. 17(b1) and 17(b2) show the performance execution control using the parts table read out from the table group TG1 for the first period. FIG. 17(c1) and FIG. 17(c2) are periods during which performance execution control is performed using the parts table read out from the table group TG2 for the second period. 17(d1) and 17(d2) show the standby display period, and FIGS. 17(e1) and 17(e2) show the fixed display period. 17(b1), FIG. 17(c1), FIG. 17(d1) and FIG. 17(e1) use the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. When the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the ready-to-win lottery table T2 shown in FIG. ) is used, and FIGS. When the notice lottery process (step S404) is executed and the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the ready-to-win lottery table T2 shown in FIG. A case where a pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the longest correspondence table) is used is shown.

Regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, at timing t1, the game cycle is started as shown in FIG. ) and the first period starts as shown in FIG. 17(b2). After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at timing t11 as shown in FIGS. 17(b1) and 17(c1), and the longest correspondence table is When used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing t21 as shown in FIGS. 17(b2) and 17(c2).

After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at timing t12 as shown in FIGS. 17(c1) and 17(d1), and the longest correspondence table is When used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing of t22 as shown in FIGS. 17(c2) and 17(d2). In this case, in a situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of standby display defined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the variable display time, but pointer update processing (FIG. 16) , the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed to continue the standby display.

After that, regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table or the longest correspondence table is used, at the timing of t2, the variation measured using the variation time counter 64a of the sound and light side RAM 64 Display time elapses. Therefore, if the shortest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts, as shown in FIGS. 17(d1) and 17(e1), and the longest correspondence table is used. If so, the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts as shown in FIGS. 17(d2) and 17(e2). Then, when the fixed display time elapses at the timing of t3, the fixed display period ends as shown in FIGS. 17(e1) and 17(e2), and as shown in FIG. ends.

As described above, the light-side MPU 62 executes the advance notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence or absence and content of the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the content of the ready-to-win effect. executed. As a result, it is unnecessary for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence and content of the notice effect, and furthermore, it is not necessary to determine the content of the ready-to-win effect, thereby reducing the processing load of the main MPU 52 regarding execution control of the effect for the game cycle. is planned. In addition, it is possible to diversify the effect mode set for one combination of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52 .

The result of the advance notice lottery process and the result of the ready-to-win effect lottery process are corresponded so that the fluctuation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same fluctuation command is received from the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加A control pattern table is set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 52 and diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to suitably design the advance notice presentation and the ready-to-win presentation.

Even if the variation display time determined by the control pattern table selected with the same variation command as a trigger may differ, the pattern display device is displayed at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52. The mode of variable display of symbols in 41 is switched from standby display to fixed display. As a result, even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, the performance for the game cycle on the pattern display device 41 is terminated at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

In a configuration where the control pattern tables to be used may be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation display time among the variation display times determined by the control pattern tables. The time corresponds to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 or less. Then, when the control pattern table corresponding to the variable display time shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is used, the control pattern table is kept until the timing when the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 elapses. , the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is maintained in the standby display. As a result, regardless of which control pattern table is to be used, the pattern display device 41 switches from the standby display to the confirmation display at the end of the game cycle. It is possible to prevent an event such as a sudden start of fixed display in the middle of or an event such that the fixed display of a pattern continues for a period longer than the normal fixed display period.

A variable time counter 64a is provided in the sound and light side RAM 64, and the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received from the main side MPU 52 is set in the variable time counter 64a. When the variable display time that is being used and measured has passed, the variable display mode of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is switched to the fixed display. As a result, even when the same command for variation is received from the main MPU 52, in a configuration where the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, the command indicating the start timing of the fixed display can be sent to the main MPU 52. It is possible to start fixed display at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 without transmitting from the main side MPU 52 .

As a configuration in which the variation display times determined by the control pattern table can differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the following configuration may be applied.

・Various parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period are controlled to correspond to a time longer than the longest fluctuation display time assumed as a situation in which these parts tables T7 to T9 are used. Data may be set, and control data for executing the standby display may be set as control data corresponding to the subsequent period following the end timing. In this case, there is no need to execute correction processing on the control pattern table for extending the execution period of the standby display. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the variation display time of the game cycle has passed.

・A control pattern table for controlling the execution of effects after the start of the standby display is provided separately from the control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effects before the start of the standby display, and the standby display starts. It may be configured to switch to a state in which the execution control of the effect is performed based on the control pattern table for standby display when it is displayed. In this case, the same control pattern table for standby display is used in any game cycle, so that the control pattern table for standby display can be used in various situations. In this configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for performing standby display over a predetermined period. Alternatively, the control pattern table for standby display may be used in a loop. In addition, the control pattern table for the standby display is set as a table that enables the standby display to be executed over the longest period assumed as the period during which the standby display is executed, and the variable display time of the game round is set. When the time elapses, the use of the control pattern table for standby display may be terminated in the middle.

・The measurement of the time for starting the confirmation display is not limited to the configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 62 executes the measurement. , and when the sound and light side MPU 62 receives the command, the sound and light side MPU 62 may perform processing for starting the confirmation display.

In a configuration where the control pattern tables to be used may be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation among the variation display times determined by these control pattern tables In place of the configuration in which the display time corresponds to the variable display time or less determined by the main MPU 52, the longest variable display time among the variable display times determined by the control pattern table is determined by the main MPU 52. A configuration that can be longer than the display time may be adopted. In this case, it is necessary to end the effect during the execution of the effect for the game round. Therefore, in such a case, an effect for forced termination is generated, and the contents corresponding to the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the type lottery of the corresponding game times in the effect for forced termination, more specifically, the game A configuration may be adopted in which the content corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the table setting process (FIG. 10) is notified. More specifically, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the period before the standby display on the pattern display device 41, the game round is restarted at the timing when the variable display time elapses. A combination of symbols determined as a result of stopping may suddenly be stop-displayed, and a confirmation display may be performed in a state in which the combination of symbols is stop-displayed.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle by the display CPU 72, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP 76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the pattern display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface P, and extends the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged side by side, and image signals are sequentially output to dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot at the lower right corner of the display surface P. FIG. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the display CPU 72 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of the image for one frame. In this regard, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed (step S601). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound and light side MPU 62, it executes command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In command interrupt processing, commands received at the input port 77 are transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 73 .

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S602: YES), the command correspondence process is executed (step S603). In the command correspondence processing, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74 . The execution target table defines the processing necessary to display an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. It is a group of information.

The commands received by the display CPU 72 from the sound and light side MPU 62 include the already explained command at the start of fluctuation, the command at the start of notice effect, the command at the start of normal reach, the command at the start of super reach, the command at the start of fixed effect, There are a command for starting standby display, a standby extension command, a fixed display start command, and the like. When these commands are received, an execution object table necessary for executing the game round effects corresponding to each of these commands on the symbol display device 41 is read.

When a negative determination is made in step S602, or when the processing of step S603 is executed, task processing is executed (step S604). In the task processing, by referring to the control data for the current processing in the execution target table set as the object to be used, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 76 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time. Set the various data required for the operation. Specifically, as the various data, address information of an area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, address information of an area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, and image data to be controlled are used. information of the target frame areas 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created, information of the coordinates when writing the image data to be controlled in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, information of the scale when writing the image data, Also, there is information such as a uniform α value (semitransparent value) when writing the image data.

After that, drawing list output processing is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described later in detail.

The task processing of step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S701). In the control start setting process, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing, based on the currently set execution target table. If it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Allocate a free buffer area so that Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S702). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S703). In the background arithmetic processing, the control update target of this time among the backmost still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image is grasped. In addition, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, a production calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect arithmetic processing, the current control update target is grasped among the effect sprites constituting the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as the ready-to-win effect, the advance notice effect and the jackpot effect. In addition, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S705). In the symbol calculation process, among the symbols to be changed and displayed in each game round, the current control update target is grasped. In addition, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S706). In the drawing instruction target grasping process, one frame image corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is selected from among the individual images that have become control update targets through the arithmetic processing in steps S703, S704, and S705. Executes a process to understand the contained individual images. The grasping is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information on the coordinates, rotation angles and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has already started, but only the individual images to be displayed. Moreover, even if the images are not selected, there is no need to uselessly draw the individual images that are not to be displayed. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 76 .

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, processing for setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, processing for creating rendering data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the rendering list transmitted from the display CPU 72, Then, a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 . Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of this process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 20(a) to 20(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information includes information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list is to be drawn. information is set. The header information includes whether or not decoding is specified and information about the address of moving image data to be decoded.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame. Parameter information is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set to be serial numerical information, and the image data information to be used is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. Further, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame are drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20(a), the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image→effect image→design.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20(b), the background data parameter P(1) includes information on the address of the area in which the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area in which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when background data is written, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when background data is written, and background data Scale information indicating the magnification when writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the initial state of , and a uniform α value indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data and information specifying the α data indicating whether or not the α data is applied and to which application target the α data is applied. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG. 20(c).

Coordinate information is not individually set for all pixels forming image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The VDP 76 is capable of recognizing that the specified coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and arranges the image data so that the one pixel at the center is on the specified coordinates. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the information volume (that is, the data volume) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 . In addition, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 do not need to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, so the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the center pixel, and may be, for example, a corner pixel such as an upper left or upper right pixel. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular, by using corner pixels as reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

The uniform α value is transparency information that is applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information that is derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is pre-stored in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

By setting the uniform alpha value and alpha data as described above, in situations where the transparency of background data and sprite data should be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of finely controlling the background data and sprite data for each pixel Since the uniform α value can be applied, the required data volume can be reduced, and by applying the α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency in units of pixels.

Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the rendering data specified in the already received rendering list has been created. If the creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S802 whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 . If a new rendering list has been received, then in step S803 processing for handling the reception is executed.

In the receiving process, from the target buffer information included in the drawing list, it is determined in which frame area 82a or 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is to be drawn.

In the subsequent step S804, a content comprehension process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the object to be read in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written into the frame areas 82a and 82b set as creation targets based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the drawing data indicated by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S806. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the next image data in the drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S804 and S805 is executed for the switched image data. In other words, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image for one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to processing only one piece of image data in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of image data are processed in one drawing process may be employed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing of , and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing of the drawing processing may be employed.

If a negative determination is made in step S802 or after the process of step S805 is executed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the display circuit 94 has completed the image signal output for one frame. If not completed, the drawing process is terminated, and if completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, and then the drawing process is terminated.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data. This is performed in parallel with the generation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the corresponding frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit for alternately switching between the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referenced each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. are regulated so that the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are drawing data drawing targets, are not output targets for outputting image signals.

<Configuration for sharing execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing the execution target table will be described.

In this pachinko machine 10, symbols are variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 in each game round (see FIG. 4(a)). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a plurality of rows such as upper row, middle row and lower row. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, nine types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and no number is attached between each main pattern. One sub pattern is arranged. Then, when the game cycle is started, from the display mode of the symbols finally stopped and displayed in the previous game cycle, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is scrolled in a predetermined direction according to the arrangement order of the symbols. Variation display of the pattern is performed. After that, the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the finally stop-displayed symbols may be different in each game round, the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be different when the game round is started. .

An example of the variable display mode of the pattern will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22(a) shows the execution period of the game round, FIG. 22(b) shows the acceleration period in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22(c) shows the high speed period in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22(d) shows the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22(e) shows the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG. 22(f) shows the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

At the timing of t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 22(a). At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 22(b), moving image display is performed such that the fluctuation display speed of symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gradually increases. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed at which the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be identified or easily identified. Since the acceleration period exists in this way, it is possible to set the start mode in the case where the variable display of symbols is started in each game cycle to be in a constant mode, and the player is notified that the game cycle has started. becomes easier to recognize.

After that, at the timing of t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22(b), and a high-speed period in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 22(c). . In the high-speed period, the variable display speeds of the symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variable display speeds at which the types of symbols cannot be identified or are difficult to identify. The type of pattern displayed on the display surface P is adjusted during the high speed period. Thus, in the configuration in which the stop result of the current game cycle is determined regardless of the types of symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game cycle, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is determined. It is possible to adjust the types of symbols to be displayed in the standby display and static display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

After that, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 22(d), the variable display speed of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed to low speed. When the low-speed display is performed, the variable display of the symbols is performed at a variable display speed at which the types of symbols can be identified or easily identified. In this case, the low speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and the high speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22(d), the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, thereby ending the scrolling display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and starting standby display. Further, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the variable display speed of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, low speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, high speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, and standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1.

After that, as shown in timing t5 in FIG. 22(e), the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, and the scrolling display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 ends and standby display starts. Further, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 22(f), the variable display speed of symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 22(f), the low speed period of the medium symbol row Z2 ends, whereby the scroll display of the symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 ends and the standby display starts. In this case, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in standby mode, and then all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are statically displayed.

When the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, an execution target table pre-stored in the memory module 74 is read out, and the display CPU 72 determines the type of symbols to be displayed on the display surface P according to the execution target table. At the same time, various parameters such as the arrangement position of the pattern to be displayed are determined. Here, the types of symbols stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game round and the types of symbols stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game round are It can be different from game to game. For example, the variable display of symbols may be started from the stopped display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the variable display of the symbols may be started from the stopped display mode as shown in FIG. There is also Further, for example, the game round may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the game round may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). In this case, if an execution target table is to be prepared in advance according to each pattern, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each mode that can be taken as a stop display mode at the start of the variable display of game rounds. At the same time, it becomes necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the modes that can be taken as the stop display mode at the end of the game cycle. As a result, the number of types of execution target tables becomes extremely large, and the storage capacity required to store the execution target tables in advance increases.

On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the variable display of the game round, and the common execution table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game round. It is configured to use the execution target table. The common execution target table will be described.

The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period. In this case, for the acceleration period, an execution object table is provided so as to be common to all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high-speed period and the low-speed period are not shared among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and an execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the execution target table determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is generated for the acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the high speed period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, and the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3. Although it is used regardless, the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 is used only when no ready-to-win effect occurs. When a ready-to-win effect occurs, a dedicated table to be executed corresponding to each ready-to-win effect is used during the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 without using a common table for execution.

The execution target table is pre-stored in the memory module 74 . Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24(a), the memory module 74 stores in advance an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period. A period storage area 101, a first high-speed period storage area 102 pre-stored with an execution object table for controlling variable display of the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 during the high-speed period, and the upper symbol row Z1 during the low-speed period. A storage area 103 for the first low speed period in which an execution object table for controlling the variable display of symbols is stored in advance, and an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in the high speed period are stored in advance. a second low-speed period storage area 104, a second low-speed period storage area 105 pre-stored with an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 during the low-speed period, and a A third high-speed period storage area 106 in which an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stored in advance, and an execution for controlling the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 during the low-speed period. A third low-speed period storage area 107 in which a target table is stored in advance is provided.

The acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period are not fixed in relation to the variable display time of the game round, and there are a plurality of types, each having a longer or shorter period. In this case, there is only one type of execution object table for the acceleration period stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution object table for the acceleration period is the variation display time of the game cycle. is longer than or equal to the longest acceleration period among the multiple types of acceleration periods determined by the relationship between As a result, even if any type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle, it is possible to use the execution target table for that one type of acceleration period.

Each of the first high-speed period storage area 102, the second high-speed period storage area 104, and the third high-speed period storage area 106 stores only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period. The high-speed period that can be controlled by the first high-speed period execution target table stored in the first high-speed period storage area 102 includes a plurality of types of the upper symbol row Z1 that are determined in relation to the variable display time of the game round. The period is equal to or longer than the longest high-speed period among the high-speed periods. In addition, the high speed period that can be controlled by the second high speed period execution target table stored in the second high speed period storage area 104 is determined by the relationship with the variable display time of the game round. It is longer than the longest high-speed period among the high-speed periods of the type. In addition, the high speed period that can be controlled by the third high speed period execution target table stored in the third high speed period storage area 106 is determined by the relationship with the variable display time of the game round. It is longer than the longest high-speed period among the high-speed periods of the type. As a result, even if any type of high-speed period is selected in each of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle, one type of high-speed period is executed for each of the symbol rows Z1-Z3. It becomes possible to use the target table.

The first low-speed period storage area 103, the second low-speed period storage area 105, and the third low-speed period storage area 107 each store a plurality of types of low-speed period execution target tables. That is, in the first low speed period storage area 103, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low speed period are stored so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of the low speed periods in the upper symbol column Z1. In the period storage area 105, a plurality of kinds of execution object tables for the second low speed period are stored so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of the low speed period of the middle symbol column Z2. stores a plurality of types of execution object tables for the third low speed period so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3. Since the execution target table for the low speed period is prepared for each type of the low speed period in this way, each low speed period can be handled by controlling the variable display of the symbols using the execution target table for the low speed period. It is possible to execute the standby display of the pattern and the static display of the pattern at the timing to do so.

FIG. 25(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period stored in advance in the acceleration period storage area 101, and FIG. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period stored in advance in the first low-speed period storage area 103. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a target table T12; Although the execution object table for the second high-speed period and the execution object table for the third high-speed period differ from the execution object table T11 for the first high-speed period in terms of the maximum value of the pointer information, the other points are the same as those in the first high-speed period. It is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high speed period. Also, an execution object table of a type different from the first low speed period execution object table T12 stored in the first low speed period storage area 103, a second low speed period execution object table, and a third low speed period execution object table Although the execution target table differs from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period in the maximum value of the pointer information, the other points are the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a), 25(b), and 26, each execution target table T10 to T12 is set with pointer information corresponding to the update timing of an image for one frame. In association with the information, an adjustment area for the display pattern and information on the content of the task are set.

Information for specifying the type of pattern to be displayed is set in the display pattern adjustment area. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set in the displayed symbol adjustment area. Here, three patterns are displayed at the same time in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. corresponds to the information of Also, as already explained, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different. 20 symbols are arranged, while 20 symbols are arranged in the middle symbol row Z2 including the main symbols and the sub-symbols. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, any one of "1" to "18" corresponds to the displayed symbol adjustment area. When information is set and the execution target table is used to control the variable display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, any one of "1" to "20" corresponds to the displayed symbol adjustment area. information is set.

For example, when "1" is set in the display pattern adjustment area corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the predetermined pointer information In the frame corresponding to , the main symbol "1", the sub-symbols between "1" and "9", and the main symbol "9" are to be displayed. Further, when "2" is set in the display pattern adjustment area, the sub-pattern between "1" and "9" and the main pattern of "9" are displayed in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information. , and sub-symbols between "9" and "8" are to be displayed.

In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as already described, but the types of symbols to be scrolled are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, in the display pattern adjustment area, the same pattern information is set over a plurality of consecutive pieces of pointer information. By changing the information set in the display pattern adjustment area as the value of the pointer information increases, the type of pattern to be displayed in the corresponding pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is changed.

The task content information includes coordinate information indicating the arrangement position of the pattern to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the pattern to be used. Parameter information such as scale information indicating is set. In this case, the coordinate information includes information that determines the arrangement position of each of the three patterns to be displayed in the corresponding frame. Therefore, it is possible to specify information on the coordinates corresponding to each of the three patterns to be displayed specified from the information on the display pattern adjustment area from the information on the content of the task. For example, when "1" is set in the display pattern adjustment area of a plurality of consecutive pointer information in the execution target table applied to the upper pattern row Z1, the task content information corresponding to the plurality of pointer information , the arrangement positions of the main symbol "1", the sub-symbol between "1" and "9", and the main symbol "9" in the corresponding symbol row gradually change in the scroll display direction. Such coordinate information is set.

In a configuration in which a plurality of patterns corresponding to the information set in the display pattern adjustment area as described above are displayed, and parameter information for the plurality of patterns is set in the task content information, the display pattern adjustment area is an area that can be rewritten under the control of the display CPU 72 after the execution object table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 . This rewriting is performed according to the type of symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the timing when the use of the corresponding execution object table is started. Further, by scrolling the symbols, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 change with the lapse of time. The switching timing of the types of the three symbols to be displayed is predetermined in each of the execution object tables T10 to T12. Therefore, when rewriting the display pattern adjustment area, the pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is set as one pointer group, and is included between one switching timing and the next switching timing. When the pointer information is one pointer group, the same pattern information is set in the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponding to each pointer information included in the one pointer group, and different patterns are set between the different pointer groups. information is set.

Information for specifying the type of pattern to be displayed is set in the display pattern adjustment area in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12. 24(b), the work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113 as an area for specifying by . there is The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. .

In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of symbol present at the head of the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 when the symbol moves from right to left is set. The display CPU 72 changes the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 each time the symbol existing at the head of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is changed to the next symbol. Update to the information of the type of pattern after. As a result, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111-113 always corresponds to the type of symbol present at the head of the corresponding symbol sequence Z1-Z3. When the display CPU 72 starts to control the variable display of symbols based on a predetermined table to be executed, the display CPU 72 displays information corresponding to the information on the type of symbols set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the predetermined table to be executed. Set in the pattern adjustment area.

In the case of starting the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, if the head symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol of "3" as shown in FIG. becomes "5". Here, the relationship between the values set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of top symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. As already explained, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged with a total of 18 symbols including the main symbols and the sub-symbols, while the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of the main symbols and the sub-symbols. Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged, the number of types of values that can be taken by the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 is different.

In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each of the 18 symbols in each row Z3. In this case, odd numbers correspond to main symbols, and even numbers correspond to sub symbols. In the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left, whereas in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. are arranged in ascending order, but the relationship between the possible values of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the top symbol is shown in the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. is the same between

In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27(b), values "1" to "20" can be taken, and each value is paired with a total of 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. 1 corresponds. In this case, the relationship between the values of "1" to "18" and the type of leading symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. FIG. Also, the value of "19" corresponds to the main symbol "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1", and the value "20" corresponds to the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". It corresponds to a sub-design between the main design of "4" and the main design of "1".

The manner of setting information for the adjustment area of the displayed symbols will be described by taking as an example the case of setting the manner of variable display of the symbols in the acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1. FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, and FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period. It should be noted that the setting mode of the information for the display pattern adjustment area of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 is that the symbols are arranged in descending order in the upper symbol row Z1. Although the pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 differ in that the patterns are arranged in ascending order, the other points are the setting manner of the information for the display pattern adjustment area of the execution object table corresponding to the upper pattern row Z1. are identical.

When the game round effect is started in the state shown in FIG. 23(a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "5". In the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged so that the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, in the display symbol adjustment area in the table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 in the acceleration period execution target table T10 read from the acceleration period storage area 101, as shown in FIG. , "5" corresponding to the current head symbol is set for the first pointer group. and the main symbol of "2". Further, for the next-ordered pointer group, "4" corresponding to the next-ordered pattern is set for the current head pattern, and for the next-ordered pointer group, the next-ordered pattern is set. "3" corresponding to the next-ordered pattern is set for the next-ordered symbol, and "2" corresponding to the next-ordered symbol for the next-ordered symbol is set for the next-ordered pointer group. ” is set. That is, numerical values are set for the adjustment area of the display pattern so that the numbers are in descending order toward the pointer group on the rear side.

When the control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 by the acceleration period execution object table T10 in which the display symbol adjustment area is set as described above is completed, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "1". ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(b), in the display pattern adjustment area in the execution object table T11 for the first high speed period read out from the storage area 102 for the first high speed period, for the first pointer group is set to "1" corresponding to the current leading pattern, and "18" corresponding to the next-ordered pattern to the current leading pattern is set to the next-ordered pointer group. . In other words, in the upper pattern row Z1, 18 patterns circulate while scrolling from right to left. "18" is set in the display pattern adjustment area in the existing pointer group. Further, values are set in the adjustment area of the display pattern so as to be serial numbers and in descending numerical order for the subsequent pointer groups.

Here, as already explained, the high speed period that can be controlled by the execution object table T11 for the first high speed period is the longest among the plurality of types of high speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle. The high-speed period is longer than the period. In this case, when it is time to use the execution object table T11 for the first high-speed period, regardless of the current high-speed period, all the display pattern adjustment areas in the execution object table T11 for the first high-speed period However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is ended, and the first low speed period The control is switched to the control by the execution object table T12 for. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period ends.

Note that this also applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. In other words, as already explained, the acceleration period controllable by the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period is the longest of the plurality of types of acceleration periods of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game round. It is longer than the acceleration period. In this case, when it is time to use the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period, regardless of the acceleration period this time, the value is applied to all the adjustment areas of the display pattern in the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period is ended, and the execution object table T11 for the first high speed period is completed. switch to control by In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

In FIG. 28(b), when the pointer group with "17" set in the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponds to the end timing of the current high speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "16". It's becoming Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, the display pattern adjustment area in the execution object table T12 for the first low speed period read out from the storage area 103 for the first low speed period shows the current state for the first pointer group. "16" is set corresponding to the top pattern of the pointer group, and values are set in the display pattern adjustment area so as to be serial numbers and in descending numerical order for the subsequent pointer groups.

As described above, the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 are used to set the values of the display pattern adjustment areas in the execution object tables T10 to T12. Thereby, even if the execution object tables T10 to T12 are configured to be used for a plurality of types of situations, the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the types of the symbols. It becomes possible to

A specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while also using the execution object table will be described below. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the command handling process is executed at step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When a command for starting variation has been received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (step S901: YES), the execution target table for the acceleration period is read from the acceleration period storage area 101 to the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, the execution target table for the acceleration period is read in correspondence with each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. is read out. However, all of these three acceleration period execution target tables are of the same type.

After that, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the high speed period execution object table is read out from the high speed period storage areas 102, 104 and 106 to the work RAM 73 (step S903). Specifically, the execution object table for the first high speed period corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is read from the first high speed period storage area 102, and the second high speed period corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 is read from the second high speed period storage area 104. The execution object table for the second high speed period is read, and the execution object table for the third high speed period corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is read from the storage area 106 for the third high speed period.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur in the current game round from the information of the variable display time in the current game round included in the command for starting the variation (step S904). When the ready-to-win effect does not occur (step S904: NO), each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 is set for the low speed period execution target table corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round. Data is read from the low-speed period storage areas 103, 105, and 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As already explained, a plurality of types of low-speed periods are set for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the low-speed periods correspond to the variable display times of game rounds. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is read. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 of this time) is read out from the storage area 103 for the first low speed period, and the second low speed period is read out. The execution object table for the second low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2) is read out from the memory area 105, and the current variable display is read from the third low-speed period storage area 107. The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the low speed period of the current lower symbol row Z3) is read.

If the ready-to-win effect occurs (step S904: YES), for each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, an execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game cycle is stored for the first low speed period. Data is read from the area 103 and the third low-speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 of this time) is read out from the storage area 103 for the first low speed period, and the third low speed period From the storage area 107 for the third low speed period, the execution object table for the third low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3) is read out. After that, a dedicated execution object table corresponding to the present ready-to-win effect is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

When the process of step S905 or step S907 is executed, information corresponding to the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is stored in the display pattern adjustment area in the execution target table for each acceleration period read out in step S902. Setting processing is executed (step S908). In the setting process, for the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the first pointer is set for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the adjustment area of the display pattern so that the pointer groups are consecutively numbered in descending numerical order. Further, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the medium symbol row Z2, the second adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the displayed symbols corresponding to the first pointer group A value of 112 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the adjustment area of the display pattern so that the pointer groups are consecutively numbered and are in ascending numerical order. In addition, in the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, the third adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the displayed symbols corresponding to the first pointer group A value of 113 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the adjustment area of the display pattern so that the pointer groups are consecutively numbered and are in ascending numerical order.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, or if the process of step S908 is executed, other processes are executed (step S909). In other processing, when a command different from the command for starting fluctuation is received, processing corresponding to the received command is executed.

Next, normal fluctuation calculation processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal variation arithmetic processing is executed in the symbol arithmetic processing of step S705 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the game round production is being executed and the ready-to-win production is not being carried out. .

First, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 means that the pointer information currently being referenced in the execution target table used for the upper symbol row Z1 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. This applies when If it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1002). If the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1003: YES), the maximum value "18" is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1004).

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 . The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 means that the pointer information currently being referenced in the execution target table used for the middle symbol row Z2 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. This applies when The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 means that the pointer information currently being referenced in the execution target table used for the lower symbol row Z3 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. This applies when

If it is time to update the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), 1 is added to the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated this time (step S1006). In this case, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated, or both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated. In some cases. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated after the addition of 1 have exceeded the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is "20", and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is "18". When the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceed the maximum values, the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 exceeding the maximum values are set to the minimum value of "1" (step S1008).

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table at the switching timing among the execution target tables used in each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. . If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game cycle. This applies to cases where it is information. Since the acceleration period is constant for all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the timing of switching from the execution object table for the acceleration period to the execution object table for the high speed period occurs simultaneously for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, if the switching timing is the high speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high speed period is the ending timing of the high speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3. is the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to . Since the high speed period is different for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the timing of switching from the execution object table for the high speed period to the execution object table for the low speed period occurs individually for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

If it is time to switch the execution target table for any one of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S1009: YES), the execution target table to be used is changed (step S1010). ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change processing, if the execution target table for the acceleration period is to be used, the execution target for the high speed period that has already been read into the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command correspondence processing (FIG. 30) is changed. If the object to be used is changed to the table and the table to be executed for the high-speed period is used, it has already been read to the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command correspondence processing (FIG. 30). Change the usage target to the execution target table.

After that, a setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the adjustment area of the display pattern in the execution target table newly determined to be used. The contents of the setting process are as described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined as the target to be used is changed to correspond to the current display content of the symbol.

When a negative determination is made in step S1009, or when the processing of step S1011 is executed, pointer update processing is executed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, the pointer information to be referenced in the execution target table to be used is updated to the pointer information in the next order for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. do. However, the pointer information update process is not executed for the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 whose execution target table to be used has been changed in the current process of the normal fluctuation calculation process.

After that, the type of image data corresponding to the pattern to be displayed is grasped for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (step S1013). When grasping this, from the value of the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution object table used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the execution object table are calculated. The type of the top pattern in Z3 is grasped, and the types of the following two types of patterns are grasped. Further, such grasping of the types of symbols is performed for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, various parameter information of all symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution object table used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes coordinates of three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, coordinates of three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and coordinates of three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

When the calculation process for normal variation is executed as described above, the pattern grasped in step S1013 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). . Also, parameter information to be applied to these patterns is set in the drawing list.

As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols is used in various situations, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables stored in advance in the memory module 74 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 . Further, even if the execution object table is shared, the types of symbols to be displayed are adjusted using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, so that the variable display of the symbols can be appropriately controlled. It becomes possible.

There is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest of the multiple types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the variable display time of the game round. It is longer than the acceleration period. Then, regardless of the type of acceleration period, the execution target table for that acceleration period is used, and the range of pointer information referenced in the execution target table is changed in relation to the type of acceleration period to be executed. be done. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for pre-storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 can be reduced. In particular, one type of execution object table for the acceleration period is commonly used for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

There is only one type of high-speed period execution table prepared for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the high-speed periods controllable by the high-speed period execution table correspond to the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3. For Z3, the period is equal to or longer than the longest high-speed period among a plurality of types of high-speed periods determined in relation to the variable display time of game rounds. Then, for one symbol row Z1 to Z3, one type of execution target table for high speed period is used regardless of the type of high speed period. The range of pointer information referenced in the table is changed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period, and to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 .

Even if the number of the execution target tables for the acceleration period and the number of the execution target tables for the high speed period are kept small as described above, the execution target tables are switched in the last order in the pointer group to be referenced. is performed at the timing when the control by the pointer information of is completed. As a result, control can be started from the pointer information of the first order in one pointer group in the newly used execution target table, so that the execution target table can be appropriately switched.

In each execution object table, a display pattern adjustment area is set in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the task in each piece of pointer information. By adjusting the information set in the display pattern adjustment area, the type of pattern to which the content of each task is applied is changed. This makes it possible to grasp the type of pattern to which the task content information is applied at each update timing simply by referring to each execution target table.

Further, when starting to use the execution target table, information on the type of pattern is set for each of the display pattern adjustment areas included in the execution target table. As a result, there is no need to execute processing for changing the information of the adjustment area of the display pattern for the execution target table during the execution of the control using the execution target table. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

<Alternative form regarding shared use of execution target table>
- The table to be executed may not have a display pattern adjustment area. In this case, by setting at least the information on the trigger for switching the values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the information on the task in the execution object table, the types of symbols to be displayed are those for adjustment. It is possible to grasp from the counters 111-113. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the execution object table in that it is not necessary to set the display pattern adjustment area in the execution object table.

・When all types of individual images are subject to control during the control period using one execution target table, the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied are always the same, but the execution target table The order of the individual images to be applied may differ from game to game. Therefore, in this case, although the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied are not adjusted, the order of the individual images to which the execution target table is applied is adjusted.

The above-described configuration that shares the execution target table may be applied to the configuration in which only one type of individual image out of a plurality of types of individual images is used to perform the specific variation display. In this case, in the execution target table, information for determining the operation content of the individual image to be the execution target of the specific variation display is set in chronological order, and the type of the individual image to which the information is applied is adjusted. The Rukoto.

・Instead of providing a common execution table for the acceleration period for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a structure in which the execution table for the acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. may be Further, the execution target table for the high speed period may be provided so as to be commonly used for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

・Switching between the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is limited to the timing when the control by the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group to be referenced is completed. Instead, it may be the timing when the control based on other pointer information is completed. However, the timing at which the switching occurs is preferably set as the timing at which the control based on the pointer information in the predetermined order in the pointer group is completed, regardless of which acceleration period or high speed period.

<Configuration for performing loop display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

32(a) and 32(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32(a), a loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that enable notification of contents corresponding to the results of the pass/fail judgment by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 50. At the same time, the loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In the loop display effect, the types of symbols G1 to G3 are different from those shown in FIG. 4(b), and the variable display of symbols in multiple rows of symbols is different from that shown in FIG. 4(b). has a different aspect. Specifically, three cubic base pattern images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side, and numerical patterns G1 to G3 are displayed in front of each of the base pattern images G6 to G8. be. When the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the base symbol images G6 to G8 are rotated in the vertical direction about a rotation axis extending horizontally through the center of the base symbol images G6 to G8, and each base is rotated along with the rotation. The patterns G1 to G3 displayed in front of the pattern images G6 to G8 are changed. 4(b) and the pattern display mode shown in FIG. 32(a) can be changed at any time. 4(b), and in the second display mode, the pattern may be displayed as shown in FIG. 32(a).

In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat a series of actions. Specifically, in a situation where the rotation display of the base symbol images G6 to G8 is not performed, as shown in FIG. A loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform an action and repeat the action while stationary (this display content is also referred to as a display while stationary). For example, the motion while stationary is such that the loop display character G4 moves up and down with its arms folded. On the other hand, in a situation where any of the base pattern images G6 to G8 is rotated, as shown in FIG. A loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat the motion during movement while performing the motion during movement (this display content is also referred to as display during movement). As the action during movement, for example, an action in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered.

In the loop display effect, the loop display background G5 does not scroll the background when the loop display character G4 is performing the stationary action, and the background is displayed at one point, as shown in FIG. 32(a). It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is moving, it is displayed as if the loop display character G4 is moving in a predetermined direction, as shown in FIG. 32(b). Along with this, the loop display background G5 is displayed as if the background image were scrolled in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed such that a series of background images scrolls over the background movement unit period, and the series of background images scrolls repeatedly each time the background movement unit period elapses. is displayed.

The flow of the loop display effects will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33(a) shows the execution period of the game cycle, FIG. 33(b) shows the flow of the periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the moving action is being performed, and FIG. 33(c). 33(d) shows the flow of scroll display of the loop display background G5 while the loop display character G4 is being periodically displayed in a situation where the stationary action is being performed.

At the timing of t1, the game cycle is started as shown in FIG. 33(a), thereby starting the variable display of the symbols G1 to G3. Further, at the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving action from the state in which it was performing the stationary action, and As shown in 33(d), the scroll display is also started in the loop display background G5.

Thereafter, until timing t6, which is the timing at which the current game cycle ends, the loop display character G4 repeats the motion during movement, and the loop display background G5 repeats a series of scroll display of background images. Specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one moving action during each of the moving unit periods Tc1 from timing t1 to timing t2, from timing t2 to timing t3, and from timing t3 to timing t4. is done. In this case, at the timing of t2 when one execution of the movement action ends, the next one execution of the movement action is started, and at the timing of t3 when one execution of the movement action ends, the next execution of the movement action is started. One execution time is started, and at the timing of t4 when one execution time of the movement action ends, the next one execution time of the movement action is started. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution of the movement action is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has passed from the start timing of the execution time of the movement action. The display modes of G4 are the same.

In addition, the loop display background G5 performs one scroll display of a series of background images during the background movement unit period Tc2 from timing t1 to timing t5. In this case, at the timing t5 when one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images ends, the next one execution of the scroll display is started. Further, the display mode of the loop display background G5 at the start timing of each execution of the scroll display is the same, and the loop display background at the timing when the same time has passed from the start timing of the execution of the scroll display. The display modes of G5 are the same.

In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution of the moving action in the loop display character G4 and one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started at the same time, the end timing of each execution is It will be different. In addition, the number of times the movement action is performed once in one game cycle may be different from the number of times the scrolling display of the series of background images is performed once in one game time.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game round ends, and the loop display character G4 is moving as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c). As shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 is stopped from the scrolling display of a series of background images. You can switch to the state where the In this case, although the timing t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution of the moving action of the loop display character G4, the moving action ends at the middle timing and the stationary action starts. Further, the timing t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution in the scrolling display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5, and the stop display of the loop display background G5 is performed while being displayed at the timing t6. be started.

At the timing t6, the loop display character G4 starts the stationary action, and the loop display character G4 repeats the stationary action until the timing t10 at which the next game round is started. Specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one stop action during each of the stop unit periods Tc3 from timing t6 to timing t7, from timing t7 to timing t8, and from timing t8 to timing t9. is done. In this case, at the timing of t7 when one execution of the motion during suspension is completed, the next execution of the motion during suspension is started, and at the timing of t8 when one execution of the motion during suspension is completed, the next execution of the motion during suspension is performed. One execution time is started, and the next one execution time of the motion during suspension is started at the timing of t9 when one execution time of the motion during suspension ends. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 is the same at the start timing of each execution time of the motion while stationary, and the loop display character is displayed at the timing when the same time has passed since the start timing of the execution time of the motion while stationary. The display modes of G4 are the same. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, in the case of comparison in the same execution period, the number of times one execution of the action during stationary is performed is greater than the number of times one execution of the action during movement is performed.

After that, at the timing of t10, a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the timing t10 is the timing in the middle of the execution of one stop action of the loop display character G4, but the loop display character G4 performs the stop action. Start moving action from the state in the middle of Then, the loop display character G4 repeats the motion while moving in the same manner as in the case of timings t1 to t6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed with the contents of the background image at that time when the previous game cycle ends at the timing t6, and the stopped state is displayed. is continued until the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t10 when a new game round is started, the series of scroll display of the background images is restarted from the stopped display state. In other words, the scroll display of the series of background images is temporarily stopped from timing t6 to timing t10, and the scroll display of the series of background images resumes at timing t10 while continuing the flow up to timing t6. It will be resumed.

When the scroll display effect is executed as described above, both the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and during the game cycle, the loop display character G4 and the loop display character G4 are displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3. Although a series of displays are repeated over a predetermined period in both the display background G5, the loop display character G4 repeats the stationary action in a situation where no game round is being executed. In G5, the scroll display of a series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, the table for the non-game round is prepared and the table for the non-game round is prepared. It is necessary to prepare a table for a number of minutes corresponding to all the timings at which the table can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, or to fix the timing at which the table is stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5. If it is attempted to prepare a number of tables during a non-game turn corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, the number of such tables will increase and the storage capacity of the memory module 74 will be squeezed, resulting in a loop. If it is attempted to fix the timing at which the display background G5 is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during the non-game round becomes uniform regardless of the timing at which the game round ends.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately. The contents of the data pre-stored in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effect will be described below with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34(a).

As shown in FIG. 34(a), an image data group 121 for loop display is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as data for performing a loop display effect. The loop display image data group 121 includes image data for displaying the base pattern images G6 to G8, image data for displaying the patterns G1 to G3 in the base pattern images G6 to G8, and a loop display character G4. Image data for display and image data for displaying the loop display background G5 are included. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing the stationary action and a plurality of types of image data used when performing the moving action. data and are included. There are also multiple types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

In the memory module 74, in addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, a character stopping table 122, a character moving table 123, and a background table 124 are stored in advance. The character dwelling table 122 is a table referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the dwelling motion. The character movement table 123 is a table referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the action during movement. The background table 124 is a table referred to for scrolling a series of background images when the loop display character G4 is moving.

FIG. 35(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character staying table 122, FIG. 35(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character moving table 123, and FIG. 35(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table 124; FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c), each table 122 to 124 contains pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Information about the content of the task is set. Information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame is set in the task content information. Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the drawing positions in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in 82 and scale information indicating the size of the image data set as the display target is set.

Specifically, in the character dwell table 122, pointer information (“0” to “99”) for the number of frames corresponding to the dwell unit period Tc3 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information includes image data of the loop display character G4 for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing of the stopped motion in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information for applying to the image data are set. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, the pointer information that was referenced at the previous drawing timing will become the next pointer information that will be referenced this time, and the loop will follow the content of the task that corresponds to that pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, the loop display character G4 performs a stop action. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the character dwell table 122 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is caused to perform the motion during dwell, the pointer information to be referenced becomes the first pointer information in the character dwell table 122. pointer information. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly execute the motion while stationary by using the character dwell table 122 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the motion while stationary is set.

In the character movement table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information includes image data of the loop display character G4 for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing during movement in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information for applying to the image data are set. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, the pointer information that was referenced at the previous drawing timing will become the next pointer information that will be referenced this time, and the loop will follow the content of the task corresponding to that pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, the moving action is performed in the loop display character G4. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the character movement table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is caused to perform the moving action, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer information in the character movement table 123. pointer information. As a result, by using the character movement table 123 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the moving action is set, the moving action can be repeatedly executed.

The background table 124 is set with pointer information (“0” to “599”) for the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2. The content of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information includes the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for displaying at one timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. and parameter information to be applied to the image data. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, the pointer information that was referenced at the previous drawing timing will become the next pointer information that will be referenced this time, and the loop will follow the content of the task corresponding to that pointer information. By executing the display control of the display background G5, a series of background images are scroll-displayed in the loop display background G5. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed during the period in which the loop display background G5 is caused to perform the scroll display, the pointer information to be referenced becomes the first pointer of the background table 124. Return to information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute scroll display by using the background table 124 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of scroll display is set.

In a configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are provided separately, the motion of the loop display character G4 during a stop can be controlled. In order to synchronize the start and the stop of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, and also to synchronize the start of the moving action of the loop display character G4 and the start of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, FIG. ), the work RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125 . The state in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1" corresponds to the situation in which the loop display character G4 is moving, and in the situation in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1" scroll display of the loop display background G5 is performed. On the other hand, the state in which the interlocking flag is "0" corresponds to the state in which the loop display character G4 is performing the motion during stop, and in the state in which the interlocking flag 125 is "0", the loop is displayed. The scrolling display of the background G5 is stopped.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, whereby the game round is completed. When the timing is reached, updating of the pointer information of the background table 124 is stopped to stop and display the loop display background G5, while the pointer information of the character holding table 122 is updated to display the loop display character G4. By performing the display control of , it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform a stop display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing when the game cycle ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect can be reduced, and the tables are stored in advance. storage capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that there are four or more types of timings at which the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game cycle ends.

A specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be described below. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing character loop arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the arithmetic processing for the character loop is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

If it is determined that it is time to start a game cycle based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the target table to be used. (step S1102). Thereafter, "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and the pointer information to be referenced in the character movement table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, information set in the task contents corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123 is used to derive parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time. to understand.

If it is determined that the game cycle end timing is reached based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character stop table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the target table to be used. (step S1106). After that, the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1107), and the pointer information to be referenced in the character stop table 122 is cleared to "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character stop table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, the information set in the task contents corresponding to the first pointer information in the character dwell table 122 is used to derive and comprehend the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time. do.

If this time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game cycle (steps S1101 and S1105: NO), the pointer information is updated for the table to be used out of the character movement table 123 and the character stop table 122 ( step S1109). Specifically, update processing is performed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), the pointer information is cleared to "0" to restore it to its initial value (step S1110: YES). S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used is used as the image data to be used this time. grasp. In step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is obtained by using the information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used. is derived and grasped.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a background loop executed by the display CPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the arithmetic processing for the background loop is executed in the arithmetic processing for the background in step S703 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

If "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referenced in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, update processing is performed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), the pointer information is cleared to the initial value (step S1204). After that, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Also, by using the information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped (step S1206). .

If the interlocking flag is not set to "1" (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is displayed this time. , the image data of the loop display background G5, which is the same as the previous one, is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1207). Further, the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information to be applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 is grasped as it is as the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time. The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as the parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes steps S1112 and S1205 or The image data ascertained in step S1207 is set as a drawing target. Parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, whereby the game cycle is completed. When the timing is reached, updating of the pointer information of the background table 124 is stopped to stop display of the loop display background G5, while the pointer information of the character holding table 122 is updated to display the loop display character G4. By performing the display control of , it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform a stop display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing of the end of the game cycle. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect can be reduced, and the tables are stored in advance. storage capacity can be reduced.

Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5. As a result, it is possible to continue updating the pointer information of the other table while not using one of the tables 122, 123, and 124, or to hold the pointer information of the other table as predetermined information. Become.

As tables for controlling the display of the loop display character G4, there are a character stop table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to display that it is stationary, and a table for causing the loop display character G4 to display that it is moving. A character movement table 123 is separately provided. As a result, when switching the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to suitably switch the variable display mode. Further, as the switching timing, it is possible to set arbitrary timing while suppressing the number of tables.

By repeatedly looping and using the character stop table 122, the loop display character G4 is repeatedly displayed during stop, and by repeatedly looping and using the character movement table 123, the character is moving to the loop display character G4. Repeat display. This makes it possible to suppress the data capacity of these tables 122 and 123 .

By repeatedly looping and using the background table 124, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to make one rotation is different from the number of image update timings required for the moving display of the loop display character G4 to make one rotation. In this configuration, a character movement table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to display during movement and a background table 124 for causing the loop display background G5 to perform scroll display are separately provided. Thus, it is possible to set only information corresponding to one round in each of the tables 123 and 124, and there is no need to set useless information exceeding one round.

When the character moving table 123 is used and the moving display of the loop display character G4 is started, the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1", whereby the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is set. is started, and when the moving display of the loop display character G4 is terminated, the interlocking flag 125 is cleared to "0", thereby scrolling the loop display background G5 using the background table 124. is terminated. As a result, in the execution object table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display effect, it is only necessary to set the information on the start timing and end timing of the moving display of the loop display character G4. There is no need to set information about the start timing and end timing of the scroll display for the background G5. Therefore, it is possible to interlock the movements of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the amount of data preset in the data table.

<Another form of loop display effects>
When the loop display character G4 is performing a stationary motion, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed, but the lighting condition of the building image and the sky scenery are not changed. The display mode, such as the hue of the image, the presence or absence of the cloud image of the sky, and the display position, may be changed. In this case, the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed even in a situation where the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, so the display of the loop display background G5 in this situation is controlled. It is preferable that a separate table is provided for this purpose.

The scroll display of the loop display background G5 may be continued regardless of whether or not the loop display character G4 is being displayed during movement. Even in this case, by using different tables for the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5, it is possible to prepare tables corresponding to the movements of the individual images G4 and G5 for one round. This eliminates the need to set useless information exceeding one round. This is the same even when the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed during movement and the loop display background G5 continues to scroll.

- In a situation where the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed while moving, the type of the loop display background G5 may be changed. Even with this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, when switching the loop display background G5, the loop can be changed. It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as it is.

In the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect without the interlocking flag 125, together with information on the switching timing between the display during stop and the display during movement of the loop display character G4, Information on the start timing and stop timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 may be set.

<Structure for performing group display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

38(a) and 38(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the group display effect. The group display effect is an effect in which a large number of group display characters G11 are displayed as if they are grouped together and move in the group display direction. The group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, body, hands and feet. Also, each group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being the same or similar characters, although the contents of actions such as limbs are different. The group display characters G11 are displayed as a group across the pattern display device 41 in one direction for a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). Comparing the case of FIG. 38(a) with the case of FIG. 38(b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. deviated in direction. Also, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape that allows the player to recognize that they are moving as a group in the moving direction.

The moving direction of the group display characters G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction. The remaining group display characters G11 may be displayed so as to move toward the center from the end opposite to the predetermined end of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

The moving image data 131 for group display is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. Moving image data is image data that is interframe-compressed so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is developed into still image data for a plurality of frames.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data consists of one frame of I-picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to the second difference data. and

The I-picture data is data capable of creating one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before when decoding. . B-picture data can be bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames later when decoding. , is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data in the moving image data 131 for group display, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. B-picture data is set as the m+1-th, . . . , n-1-th frame data. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

By executing decoding processing on the moving image data 131 for group display, still image data for a plurality of update timings (hereinafter also referred to as decoded image data) is created from the moving image data 131 for group display. The Rukoto. In this case, the moving image data 131 for group display has a longer cycle than the image update cycle in the pattern display device 41 because of the compression rate of the image data.

The relationship between the update cycle of the image and the cycle in which still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40(a). 40(a1) shows the update timing of the image in the pattern display device 41, FIG. 40(a2) shows the usable timing of the image data previously stored in the memory module 74 as still image data, and FIG. 40(a3). ) indicates the usable timing of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display.

The update period Td1 of the image in the pattern display device 41 is 20 msec as already explained, and as shown in FIG. , t6 and t7, respectively, the image on the pattern display device 41 is updated. In addition, since the image data pre-stored in the memory module 74 as still image data can be used as it is, as shown in FIG. Available.

On the other hand, the usable cycle Td2 of the decoded image data based on the moving image data 131 for group display is twice the update cycle Td1 of the image in the pattern display device 41, as shown in FIG. 40(a3). Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at timings t1, t3, t5, and t7, new decoded image data is used at timings t2, t4, and t6. Unable to use.

In this case, at the timings t2, t4, and t6, the same decoded image data as the decoded image data used at the immediately preceding timings t1, t3, and t5 are used. can also be used. However, if the same decoded image data is simply used, there is a risk that the image will be jerky, making it impossible to display a smooth moving image. On the other hand, at two consecutive update timings when the same decoded image data is used, by differentiating the drawing range in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data, This reduces the occurrence of jerky images.

FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn are made different in the same decoded image data 132. FIG.

When drawing data is created in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b, and the resolution of each frame region 82a and 82b is 800×600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, each decoded image data 132 obtained by executing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display has more dots than the frame areas 82a and 82b at the size of the initial magnification after the decoding process. number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both horizontal and vertical dimensions. As a result, even when the same decoded image data 132 is updated twice in a row, the rendering ranges of the frame areas 82a and 82b are changed in accordance with the movement direction of the group display character G11. It is possible to display the group display character G11 as a whole.

Note that the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 is not limited to this. However, of the horizontal and vertical directions, the direction different from the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group is the same size as or shorter than the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. A certain configuration may be used.

At the first update timing of the two successive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, the group display characters G11 move as a group in the decoded image data 132 as shown in FIG. 40(b). A drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set toward the end on the front side in the direction of drawing, that is, the end on the left side. On the other hand, at the update timing on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 40(c), the group display characters G11 in the decoded image data 132 are shifted to the original side end in the moving direction, that is, to the right end. Then, the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. That is, at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is opposite to the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11, which was displayed at a predetermined position at the front update timing, is displayed at a position moved to the left of the predetermined position at the rear update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the group display characters G11 move in the direction of movement as a group between the two update timings. Such display is possible. In the decoded image data 132, the range outside the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is excluded from the drawing target.

Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is predetermined. It is the amount of movement. On the other hand, in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next usage timing for the group display character G11 at the rear update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front update timing is also the above-mentioned predetermined movement amount. are identical.

That is, the first decoded image data 132 at one timing of use and the second decoded image data 132 at the next timing of use are displayed at two update timings using the decoded image data 132 at one timing of use. between the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between, the update timing of the rear side displayed using the first decoded image data 132, and the update timing of the front side displayed using the second decoded image data 132. The amount of movement of the group display character G11 is set to be the same as the predetermined amount of movement. More specifically, in both cases of using the first decoded image data 132 and using the second decoded image data 132, when compared at the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed, From the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used, the predetermined group display character at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used. The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is from the predetermined display position of the group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used to after when the first decoded image data 132 is used. It is twice the movement amount to the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the update timing of the side. In addition, at least the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction within the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification so as to enable setting of such a movement amount. The dimension in the direction (specifically, the dimension in the horizontal direction) is set larger than the dimension in the direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b by at least the predetermined amount of movement. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 constant between one update timing and the next update timing, and it is possible to smoothly move the group display character G11. becomes.

A specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described below. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing for the group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the arithmetic processing for the group display effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the group display effect should be executed.

If it is time to decode the moving image data 131 for group display (step S1301: YES), the address of the moving image data 131 for group display in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302). The address of the work RAM 73 for developing the moving image data 131 for display as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Also, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the same decoded image data 132 as at the previous update timing is to be used at one update timing. In some cases, the use of new decoded image data 132 is specified, and when the value of the same use flag is "1", the use of the same decoded image data 132 as at the previous update timing is specified. .

When the processes of steps S1302 to S1305 are executed, the address information of the moving image data 131 for group display is set in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). At the same time, information on the destination address of the moving image data 131 for group display is set, and decode designation information is also set. When receiving the drawing list, the video decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42(a). Specifically, the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the moving image data for group display is obtained from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area where 131 is developed as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read out from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for group display effect (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the processing of step S1305 is executed, is the value of the same use flag of work RAM 73 "0"? It is determined whether or not (step S1306). If the value of the same use flag is "0" (step S1306: YES), this means that it is update timing for using new decoded image data 132 this time. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current order of use among the plurality of decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1307).

After that, "A, A" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining at which position the central pixel in the image data to be used should be arranged with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. In the case of "A, B" coordinates, the set positions of the decoded image data 132 for the frame areas 82a and 82b are the positions shown in FIG. is set. Note that the value of A and the value of B are the same for any type of decoded image data 132 . Thereafter, after updating and grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as at the current update timing will be used.

If the same use flag is set to "1" (step S1306: NO), this means that the current update timing uses the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 where the same decoded image data 132 as the previous time is expanded is grasped (step S1311).

After that, "A-1, B" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1312). In the case of "A-1, B" coordinates, the set positions of the decoded image data 132 for the frame areas 82a and 82b are the positions shown in FIG. is set. Thereafter, after grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). As a result, the new decoded image data 132 will be used at the next update timing.

When the processing of steps S1307 to S1310 or steps S1311 to S1314 is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the decoded image data 132 to be used this time. is set, and parameter information, including coordinate information, to be applied to the decoded image data 132 is set. When the drawing list is received, the VDP 76 executes group display setting processing as part of the content grasping processing executed in step S804 of the drawing processing (FIG. 21). FIG. 42(b) is a flow chart showing setting processing for group display.

In the group display setting process, first, information on the address where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). Also, coordinate information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), and other parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503). ).

By executing the group display setting process as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. Image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is "A, B", the range shown in FIG. 40(b) is drawn, and if the coordinate information is "A-1, B", the range shown in FIG. 40(c) is drawn. be. Then, by outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data, a group display effect is executed.

As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 based on the moving image data 131 for group display can be used is twice the update cycle of the image in the pattern display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 are used, the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the same decoded image data 132 are different. This makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of image jerks.

In two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the former update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the latter update timing are the same. parts are duplicated. As a result, it is possible to generate a slight image change between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132 .

At two successive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, each group display character G11 is changed in the group display image at the rear update timing with respect to the group display image at the front update timing. The range to be drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same decoded image data 132 is changed so that the position is shifted forward in the moving direction. As a result, even with a configuration in which the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

At least the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group, out of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction within the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification, is set wider than the corresponding direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. ing. As a result, even if the same decoded image data 132 is updated twice in a row, the rendering ranges of the frame areas 82a and 82b are changed in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11. It is possible to display the group display character G11 as a whole.

The first decoded image data 132 at one timing of use and the second decoded image data 132 at the next timing of use are generated between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one timing of use. Group display between the amount of movement of the group display character G11, the rear side update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132, and the front side update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132. is set to be the same as that of the character G11. This makes it possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 constant between one update timing and the next update timing, so that the group display character G11 can be smoothly moved.

An image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. This makes it less noticeable that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two successive update timings.

<Another form regarding group display effect>
The dimension (specifically, the dimension in the horizontal direction) in at least the specific direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group, out of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction within the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification. The size of the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b in the specific direction is not limited to a configuration that is set larger by at least a predetermined amount of movement, and the decoded image data 132 after decoding is enlarged from the size of the initial magnification. Thus, at least the dimension in the specific direction may be set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b by at least a predetermined amount of movement. In this case, although it is necessary to perform size enlargement processing on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is moved by a predetermined amount between two successive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It is possible to change the amount.

- The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement processing from the size at the initial magnification is the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. must be set to be at least a predetermined amount of movement larger than .

- The group display character G11 is not limited to humans, and may be other animals such as cats, fish, and dogs, or may be pictographic objects other than animals.

The configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of successive update timings and the drawing ranges in the frame areas 82a and 82b are changed at each update timing is adopted so that a plurality of the same group display characters G11 are the same. It may be applied to images other than images that generally move in a direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied when a moving image is displayed in which a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display section 41a of the pattern display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

The decoding obtained by decoding the moving image data 131 uses the same image data at a plurality of consecutive update timings and makes the drawing ranges for the frame areas 82a and 82b different at each update timing. It may be applied to image data other than the image data 132 . For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data pre-stored in the memory module 74 .

<Configuration for performing effective period display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the effective period display effect will be described.

FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the effective period display effect. The effective period display effect is an operation corresponding effect that changes the effect depending on whether the operation device 48 for effect is operated or not operated during the effective period during which the operation of the operation device 48 for effect is validated. It is an effect of displaying the valid period on the symbol display device 41 when it is performed.

In the effective period display effect, an operation prompting image G21 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 to allow the player to recognize that the operation device 48 for effect should be operated, and the operation device 48 for effect is displayed. A validity period image G22 is displayed to allow the player to recognize the remaining period during which the operation of . Specifically, as the operation prompting image G21, an image representing the operating device 48 for effect is displayed, and an image that makes it possible to recognize that the operating device 48 for effect is being operated is displayed. As long as the player can recognize that the device 48 should be operated, the specific contents of the display are arbitrary.

A frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed as the valid period image G22. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the valid period image G22, and is displayed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The band image G24 is displayed so as to extend rightward within the frame portion of the frame image G23 with the left end of the frame portion as the base end, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the frame image G23 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion, and as the remaining effective period becomes shorter, the leading end position, which is the right end position, is shifted as shown in FIG. 43(b). It is displayed so that it gradually moves toward the left end and the range filled in the frame of the frame image G23 becomes narrower. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the leading end position of the band image G24, and is displayed so as to move along with the leading end position of the band image G24 when the leading end position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Also, the blinking image G25 is displayed as if it were blinking in its entirety.

Here, in the case of a configuration in which the blinking display is performed while the blinking image G25 moves in accordance with the movement of the band image G24, the data for controlling the movement of the belt image G24 and the data for controlling the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are displayed. are collectively set by one piece of animation data or the like, if one of the moving speed of the leading edge of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the other is also changed accordingly. end up A case where the event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 44(a) shows how the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44(b) shows how the blinking period of the blinking image G25 changes.

When the effective period display effect is started, at the timing of t1, moving display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 44(a), and blinking is performed as shown in FIG. Blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t5, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

After that, at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the moving speed of the leading end portion of the strip image G24 is changed to a second speed that is faster than the first speed. The speed change is performed by referring to the data in a predetermined order among the reference data set in time series in the data for controlling the display of the movement of the band image G24, and performing the display control, and then changing the data in the specific order after that. is referred to and the time required for display control is shortened. Specifically, when pointer information set with a serial number and task content information are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the pointer information as data for display control, a predetermined After performing the display control of the band image G24 with reference to the task content information corresponding to the order pointer information, the task content information corresponding to the specific order pointer information that is the order after the predetermined order. By changing the number of occurrences of image update timings until display control of the band image G24 is performed, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed. In this case, if the data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the flashing image G25 are collectively set in the data for display control, the tip portion of the band image G24 is moved. In order to change the speed, display control is performed by referring to the information of the contents of the tasks corresponding to the pointer information of the predetermined order, and then the tasks corresponding to the pointer information of the specific order, which is the order after the predetermined order, are displayed. If the number of occurrences of image update timing that occurs before display control is performed with reference to the content information is changed, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will also be changed accordingly.

In other words, when the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing t5 in FIG. 44(a), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is is also changed from the first blinking period Te1 to the second blinking period Te2. This is the same when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. When the data for each display control is collectively set, if the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed. Movement speed is also changed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the flashing image G25 are provided together. provided separately. The contents of the data pre-stored in the memory module 74 for executing the effective period display effect will be described below with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 45, the memory module 74 stores frame display image data 141 for displaying the frame image G23 and band display image data 141 for displaying the band image G24 as data for performing the effective period display effect. Image data 142, lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state, and lighting image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state are stored in advance. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the VDP 76, the frame image G23 can be displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG.

The band display image data 142 is set to a size that can fill the entire frame of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and the left end of the band image G24 is aligned with the left end of the frame of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of that size is displayed so that the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame regions 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image is displayed in which the leading end portion of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end.

Both the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 are image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144 are the same at the initial magnification. size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 causes a relatively bright blinking image G25 to be displayed, and the turning off image data 144 causes a relatively dark blinking image G25 to be displayed. Only one of the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144 is used at each update timing of the image. Coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set so that they are displayed overlapping from the near side. By alternately repeating the period during which the lighting image data 143 is used and the period during which the lighting image data 144 is used, the display of the flashing image G25 in the lighting state and the flashing image G25 in the light off state are alternately repeated. display is alternately repeated. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light were blinking.

In the memory module 74, in addition to various image data 141 to 144, a band display table 145 and a flashing display table 146 are stored in advance. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24. Specifically, the horizontal size information of the band display image data 142 and the position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 are defined. This is the data obtained. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25. Specifically, the image data to be used for the blinking image G25 among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144 is defined. This is the data obtained. The band display table 145 and blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. FIG. As shown in FIG. 46(a), pointer information is set in the band display table 145 so as to be serial numbers. A combination of the information and the positional information of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 is narrowed. Then, the band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b so that the left end portion of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. An image moving toward is displayed. Further, the leading end position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced is the leading end portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is reduced and drawn at the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. corresponds to the position of Then, the image data to be used out of the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144 is drawn so as to be at the position corresponding to this tip position information, so that it overlaps the tip portion of the strip image G24 from the front side. Thus, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

When the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, one display is performed over the band side specific number of image update timings, which is a plurality of times (for example, five times). The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referenced. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the next image update timing with respect to the band side specific number of image update timings, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are specified by the band side. Reference is made over the number of image update timings. In this way, the pointer information is updated each time the band-side specific number of image update timings elapses, so that the band image G24 is displayed so that the leading end portion moves at the first speed, and the leading end portion of the band image G24 is displayed. A blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the near side.

On the other hand, when the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at a second speed faster than the first speed, the band side predetermined number of times ( For example, the same size information and tip position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referenced over two image update timings. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the timing of updating the image next to the timing of updating the image a predetermined number of times, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are changed to the information specified by the band side. Reference is made over the number of image update timings. In this way, the pointer information is updated each time the predetermined number of image update timings on the band side have passed, so that the band image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at the second speed, which is faster than the first speed. At the same time, a blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the leading end portion from the front side.

FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 46(b), pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to have serial numbers, and image data for turning on 143 and image data for turning off 144 are associated with each piece of pointer information. Among them, the image data to be used is set. The image data 143 and 144 set as the object of use in the pointer information to be referenced is the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By drawing at the position, the blinking image G25 in the state corresponding to the image data 143 and 144 to be used is superimposed on the front end portion of the band image G24 and displayed.

In the flashing display table 146, lighting image data 143 is set as image data to be used for the pointer information of "0" to "9", and for the pointer information of "10" to "19", 144 is set as the image data to be used. When display control is performed using the flashing display table 146, 1 is added to the pointer information to be referenced each time the pointer information is updated, and the value of the pointer information after the addition of 1 is the maximum value. 19", the value of the pointer information to be referenced is cleared to "0". In other words, when the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 is referred to in the blinking display table 146 while the effective period display effect is being performed, the reference period is assumed to be one from "0" to "19". is repeated multiple times. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data in the blinking display table 146 .

When display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking cycle Te1, the blinking image G25 is displayed once over the image update timing of the blinking side specific number of times, which is a plurality of times (for example, twice). The same used image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information of . Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the next image update timing with respect to the blinking side specific number of image update timings, and the same image data 143 and 144 to be used corresponding to the pointer information are updated. is referred to over the flashing side specific number of image update timings. In this manner, the pointer information is updated each time the flashing-side specific number of image update timings elapses. Blinking display is performed at the blinking period Te1.

On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the second blinking cycle Te2, a predetermined number of blinking times (for example, 1 time), which is smaller than the specified number of blinking times, is performed. The same used image data 143 and 144 corresponding to one piece of pointer information is referenced over the image update timing. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the next image update timing for the predetermined number of image update timings on the flashing side, and the same image data 143 and 144 to be used corresponding to the pointer information are updated. is referred to over a predetermined number of image update timings on the blinking side. In this manner, the pointer information is updated each time the predetermined number of image update timings on the flashing side elapse, so that the flashing image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the band image G24 from the front side is displayed in the second direction. A blinking display is performed at the blinking period Te2.

How the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table 145 and the flashing display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(a2) show the movement speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24, and FIGS. 47(b1) and 47(b2) show the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

First, with reference to FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(b1), the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed under the condition that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is constant will be described.

When the effective period display effect is started, at the timing of t11, the moving display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47(a1), and blinking is performed as shown in FIG. Blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t15, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to the band-side predetermined number of times which is smaller than the band-side specified number of times. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(a1), the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed, which is faster than the first speed. On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the blinking side specific number of times, as shown in FIG. 47(b1). The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47(a2) and 47(b2), the case where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed under the condition that the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is constant will be described.

By starting the effective period display effect, at the timing of t21, moving display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47(a2), and blinking is performed as shown in FIG. 47(b2). Blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, from the timing of t21 to the timing of t25, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t25, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to the blinking side predetermined number of times which is smaller than the blinking side specific number of times. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b2), the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking period Te2 shorter than the first blinking period Te1. On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the band-side specified number of times, as shown in FIG. 47(a2). In addition, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display of the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25. By providing them, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 while keeping the other one unchanged. As a result, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect. .

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation that a special effect corresponding to the operation will be executed when the operation device 48 for effect is operated during the valid period. It is Specifically, the first display content is the case where the movement speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking period Te1 until the end. The second display content is the case where the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed in the middle and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end. Assuming that the moving speed of the leading end portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking period Te2 halfway through is the third display content, the second display content is The degree of expectation is higher for the first display content than for the first display content, and the degree of expectation for the third display content is set to be higher than that for the second display content. As a result, by confirming the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that a special effect corresponding to operation will be executed when the operation device 48 for effect is operated. , it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the effective period display effect.

Further, when the operation device 48 for performance is operated, the special performance corresponding to the operation is executed in response to the operating device 48 for performance. The probability of occurrence of the operation-responsive special effect is set so that the expectation of a big win result in the corresponding game round is higher than in the case. In this case, as described above, the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are associated with the execution expectation level of the operation-responsive special effect, so the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are also associated with the expectation level of the jackpot result. It is assumed that Also from this point, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the effective period display effect.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which one of a plurality of types of operation corresponding effects including the first operation corresponding effect and the second operation corresponding effect is executed when the effect operating device 48 is operated during the valid period. , the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 may be associated with the execution expectation level of the predetermined operation-responsive effect.

A specific processing configuration for executing the effective period display effect will be described below. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for valid period display executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the arithmetic processing for valid period display is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the valid period display effect should be executed.

If it is time to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and blink display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as processing for setting the moving speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set. As processing, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blink display table 146 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first blink cycle Te1 (step S1604).

After that, among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144, the image data to be used set in association with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is used for displaying the blinking image G25 this time. As image data is grasped (step S1613), frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S1614). After that, the size information set in association with the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display table 145 The tip position information set in association with the first pointer information is grasped as position information for drawing the image data to be used this time out of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 (step S1616). Furthermore, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the arithmetic processing for valid period display is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) contains the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144. Of these, the image data to be used, which is set in association with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing objects. Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

If it is not the time to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605). When the movement speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, and when the number of occurrences of image update timing since the previous update of the pointer information of the band display table 145 is the band side specific number of times When it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side and the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information of the band display table 145 is updated last time. When the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image from G24 is a predetermined number of times on the band side, it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side. If it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 is incremented by one (step S1606). ).

If it is not the time to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to update the pointer information on the flashing image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking period Te1, and when the number of occurrences of the image update timing since the previous update of the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is the blinking side specific number of times, When it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the second blinking cycle Te2, the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 has been updated since the previous time. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing is the predetermined number of times on the flashing side, it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the flashing image G25 side. If it is time to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by one (step S1608). ).

If it is not the timing to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not the movement speed is to be changed and, if the movement speed is to be changed, the change timing has been determined at the start of the effective period display effect this time, and the display CPU 72 determines whether or not the timing is determined at the start. judge. In addition, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing, which is the change timing, is determined at the start of the effective period display effect this time, and the determined number of occurrences of the image update timing is determined. A conceivable method is to specify that it is the above-mentioned change timing when the If it is time to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the moving speed setting process of the band image G24 is performed to set the pointer information update cycle in the band display table 145 to the second speed. The corresponding update cycle is set (step S1610).

If it is not the timing to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). Whether or not there is a change in the blinking cycle and, if the blinking cycle is to be changed, the change timing has been determined at the start of the effective period display effect, and the display CPU 72 determines whether the timing is determined at the start. judge. In addition, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing, which is the change timing, is determined at the start of the effective period display effect this time, and the determined number of occurrences of the image update timing is determined. A conceivable method is to specify that it is the above-mentioned change timing when the If it is time to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), as processing for setting the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 corresponds to the second blinking cycle Te2. (step S1612).

After that, among the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144, the image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the table for blinking display 146, is displayed as the blinking image G25 this time. It is grasped as image data to be used (step S1613). In this case, if the processing of step S1608 has not been executed in the current processing cycle, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that was referred to in the previous processing cycle is grasped, and in the current processing cycle of step S1608. When the process is being executed, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that has been newly updated this time and has become a reference target is grasped. Also, the frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614).

After that, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the current pointer information to be referenced is grasped as the size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display is performed. The leading end position information set in correspondence with the current reference target pointer information in the table 145 is used as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time out of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144. grasp. In this case, if the processing of step S1606 has not been executed in the current processing cycle, the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to in the previous processing cycle are grasped, and the current processing cycle is executed. If the process of step S1606 has been executed in step S1606, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that has been newly updated and has become a reference target are grasped. Also, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the arithmetic processing for valid period display is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) contains the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144. Of these, the image data to be used set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the flashing display table 146, the image data for frame display 141, and the image data for band display 142 are set as drawing objects. . Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display of the display contents of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25. As a result, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the strip image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 while keeping the other one unchanged. As a result, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect. .

In particular, when changing the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24, it is only necessary to change the update period of the pointer information in the band display table 145. A table 145 is used. Similarly, when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle, because only the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed. used. For example, in a configuration in which data for controlling the display of the display content of the band image G24 and data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in one table, the leading end portion of the band image G24 If one of the moving speed and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is to be changed without affecting the other, it will be necessary to separately prepare a corresponding table, and the table will contain combinations of the moving speed and the blinking cycle. Required for several types. As a result, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance increases. On the other hand, the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the moving speed, and the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking period. While suppressing an increase in the memory capacity of 74, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the effective period display effect.

In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to position information for setting image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 is set. As a result, information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in the configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are separately provided, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative positions of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25. .

<Another form of effective period display effect>
The pointer information of the flashing display table 146 is only "0" and "1", one of which corresponds to the lighting image data 143, and the other corresponds to the lighting image data. A configuration compatible with H.144 may also be used. In this case, the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to either the first blinking period Te1 or the second blinking period Te2 by adjusting the update period of the pointer information between "0" and "1". becomes possible. According to this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the amount of data in the blinking display table 146 .

When the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference object in the band display table 145 at each update timing of the image, and the leading end of the band image G24 is is the second speed, a value of 2 or more may be added to the reference target pointer information in the band display table 145 each time the image is updated. In other words, the value added to the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 may differ between the first speed and the second speed at each image update timing. Even with this configuration, while using the same band display table 145, it is possible to change the movement speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed.

When the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1, the pointer information to be referenced in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by 1 at each update timing of the image, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed. In the case of the second blinking period Te2, a configuration may be adopted in which a value of 2 or more is added to the reference target pointer information in the blinking display table 146 at each image update timing. In other words, the value to be added to the reference target pointer information in the blink display table 146 may be different for each image update timing between the first blink period Te1 and the second blink period Te2. Even with this configuration, while using the same blinking display table 146, it is possible to change the blinking period of the blinking image G25 between the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2.

The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. There may be. Further, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

・Instead of using the blinking display table 146 to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, the blinking image G25 is displayed by program processing without using a table. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of image data to be used for processing is determined.

- In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes over time, at least one of the shape and color of the band image G24 may change over time. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time. It is good also as a structure which changes with.

<Configuration for number display effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the number display effect will be described.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the number display effect. The number display effect is the effect of displaying the number of game balls acquired by the player from the start of the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the acquired number) on the symbol display device 41. . The acquired number is the difference between the total number of game balls paid out to the player from the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the total number of game balls shot into the game area PA from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. It's about. In addition, the display of the acquired number by the number display effect is started when the opening period is started in the opening and closing execution mode, and when the opportunity to pay out the game balls to the player occurs in the opening and closing execution mode and when the game ball is shot. is performed, the display contents are changed accordingly. 49, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the pattern display device 41 while the display effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls obtained in the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for effecting number display.

The MPU 52 of the main controller 50 is electrically connected to the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the launched ball detection sensor 155 and the return ball detection sensor 156. FIG. The winning detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of a winning that triggers the payout of game balls. A plurality of types are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives detection signals from each of the plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151-154. Then, when the MPU 52 receives a signal corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the corresponding ball entering portion from one of the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning is received. A prize ball command for instructing the payout is transmitted to the payout control device 55. - 特許庁

The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which an MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a includes a ROM 159b storing various control programs executed by the MPU 159a and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 159b. A RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. The payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, and when the MPU 159a receives a prize ball command from the main control device 50, the payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56 is driven. The game balls are started to be put out by starting the output of the signal. Then, the MPU 159a, when the number of game balls to be paid out, which is measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56, becomes the number corresponding to the number information set in the prize ball command. Then, the output of the driving signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop the payout of the game balls. In addition, the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 sends a payout completion signal to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 indicating that the payout of one game ball has been completed each time the payout detection sensor 56b detects one game ball. to send.

The shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided in a game ball shooting mechanism 161 for shooting a game ball toward the game area PA when the shooting operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing an enlarged lower region of the inner frame 13. FIG. The game ball shooting mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13 . The game ball shooting mechanism 161 includes a shooting rail 162 extending toward a guide rail formed on the game board 24, and an electric actuator for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 162 from the upper tray 46a toward the guide rail. A certain solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one game ball B1 supplied on the shooting rail 162 at a position where the solenoid 163 can be launched are provided. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 each time a predetermined shooting cycle (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and the solenoid 163 launches the game ball.

A shot ball detection sensor 155 in the game ball shooting mechanism 161 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the shooting rail 162 . That is, the shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball shot toward the guide rail from the most downstream part of the shooting rail 162, and the game ball detected by the shooting ball detection sensor 155 is detected by the shooting rail. 162 will not flow backwards.

The shot ball detection sensor 155 consists of an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and outputs a HI level signal as a shot ball detection signal when the game ball B1 exists within the detection range. In a situation where B1 does not exist within the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a ball non-detection signal. Therefore, by the shot ball detection sensor 155, it is possible to specify the number of game balls that have passed the position of the most downstream part of the shooting rail 162 and have been shot toward the guide rail. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Also, the shot ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

A return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in a return ball recovery unit 165 for recovering game balls that have been shot from the most downstream part of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail but flowed backward on the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. It is The return ball recovery part 165 is formed in a region created by separating the guide rail and the launch rail 162 in the lateral direction on the front surface of the inner frame 13, and exists between both rails. The return ball collecting portion 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and the space is formed to open upward. The return ball collecting portion 165 is communicated with the lower tray 47a, and the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collecting portion 165 is discharged to the lower tray 47a by its own weight.

The return ball detection sensor 156 in the return ball recovery section 165 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the return ball recovery section 165 . In other words, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect game balls flowing down from the most downstream portion of the return ball collecting portion 165 toward the lower tray 47a.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal when the game ball exists within the detection range. When the ball does not exist within the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a return ball non-detection signal. Therefore, the return ball detection sensor 156 makes it possible to specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165 . Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

Returning to the description referring to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives the result of receiving the payout completion signal from the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the result of receiving the fired ball detection signal from the fired ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball. A command corresponding to each reception result of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 62 . In detail about these commands, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 counts the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and when the payout completion signal is received 10 times, the payout of 10 game balls is completed. to the sound and light side MPU 62. In addition, the MPU 52 of the main control unit 50 receives the payout completion signal last time, and if the next payout completion signal is not received even after the reception waiting period (for example, 2 sec) has passed, the prize ball completion command is sent last time. After that, even if the number of times the payout completion signal is received does not reach 10 times, the prize ball completion command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 62.例文帳に追加Information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the previous transmission of the prize ball completion command is set in the prize ball completion command. Further, when the MPU 52 of the main control unit 50 receives a ball detection signal from the ball detection sensor 155, it sends a launch execution command indicating that one game ball has been launched to the sound and light side MPU 62. When a return ball detection signal is received from the return ball detection sensor 156, a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball has been generated is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 62.

When the sound and light side MPU 62 is in the open/close execution mode, each time it receives a prize ball completion command, a launch execution command, and a return ball generation command from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50, it is possible to display the number of acquired balls. Perform measurement processing. Then, a measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement process is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the transmission timing of the measurement command comes. The display CPU 72 causes the pattern display device 41 to display the number display image G31 in a state in which the content of the received measurement command is reflected.

The processing contents executed by the sound/light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 for performing the number display effect will be described below. First, the contents of processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing counting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 . Note that the counting process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the prize ball completion command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), the counter 166 for measurement provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to the prize ball completion command received this time. A value corresponding to the number of game balls that have been put out is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter that is used to measure the number of acquisitions generated from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, when a prize ball completion command indicating that the payout of 10 game balls has been completed is received, a value of "10" is added to the counter 166 for measurement, indicating that the payout of 3 game balls has been completed. is received, the value of "3" is added to the counter 166 for measurement.

If a firing execution command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (steps S1701 and S1704: YES), "1" is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both positive and negative values. The value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "4", and when the launch execution command is received when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0", the value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "-1". Also, when the return ball generation command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (steps S1701 and S1706: YES), "1" is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the measurement command output setting process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 . Note that the counting process is executed in the command selection process of step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the measurement command output setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the measurement command (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output period elapses in the open/close execution mode. The command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31. More specifically, the command output cycle is longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31 twice. It is set as a period shorter than the period tripled. The update period of the number display image G31 is set to be longer than 20 msec, which is the update period of the image for one frame, and is set to 300 msec, for example. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 generated when the update cycle of the number display image G31 has passed corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

If it is time to output the measurement command (step S1801: YES), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of acquisitions by determining whether the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0" or more. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). If the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to an increase in the acquired number (step S1802: YES), an increase measurement command is read from the sound and light side ROM 63, and the measurement counter is set in response to the read increase measurement command. Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the measurement command for increase after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has increased, and also specifies the number of the increase.

When it is time to output a measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than "0" (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the decrease in the number of acquisitions. means that In this case, the decrease measurement command is read from the sound and light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read decrease measurement command (step S1805). Then, the measurement command for decrease after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has decreased, and also specifies the number of items corresponding to the decrease.

When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to "0" (step S1807). As a result, the information on the number of acquisitions to be set in the measurement command is erased from the measurement counter 166 .

Next, the contents of processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing measurement command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the measurement command handling process is executed in the command handling process of step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When the measurement command for increase is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 stores the increase in the acquired number set in the measurement command for increase received this time. A value corresponding to the number is added (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for specifying, by the display CPU 72, the number of increments and decrements to be reflected in the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the decrease measurement command is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the decrease in the acquired number set in the decrease measurement command received this time. Subtract the value (step S1904).

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing calculation processing for measurement display executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the arithmetic processing for measurement display is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19).

If it is time to update the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), and if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction process of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is executed. Execute (step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, when the value of the total counter 168 fluctuates, the content of the number display image G31 fluctuates accordingly. In the subtraction processing of the total counter 168 , the value of the decrease in the acquired number set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the value of the current total counter 168 . In other words, if the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to a decrease in the number of acquisitions, regardless of the value, the value of the reduction in the number of acquisitions set in the reflection counter 167 is used for summing. It is reflected in the value of counter 168 . As a result, when the number of acquired items decreases, the entire amount of the decrease is collectively reflected in the display of the number of acquired items in the number display image G31. After that, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

If it is the update timing of the number display image G31 and the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" or more (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005). If the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0". In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at this update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the reflection counter 167 is the first reference value or more (step S2006). Here, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the number display image G31 is updated so as to increase the display of the acquired number can be easily continued for a long time, and the acquired number increases in the open/close execution mode. It becomes easy to give the player the impression of being there.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the obtained number at one update timing of the number display image G31 are set. , "3", which is a second addition target value smaller than the first addition target value, and "1", which is a third addition target value smaller than the second addition target value, are set. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than the value "12" preset as the first reference value, "5" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is If the second reference value is smaller than the first reference value and is larger than the preset value of "5", then "3" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is selected. is less than or equal to "5", "1" is selected as the value to be added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increment of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from becoming extremely large without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

Incidentally, when the payout motor 56a is operating at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out one game ball every 24 msec. Also, the shooting cycle of game balls is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output period of the measurement command by the sound and light side MPU 62 is approximately 720 msec. Then, since the maximum value of "18" is set as the value for the increase in the number of acquisitions included in the increase measurement command, the value of the reflection counter 167 will never be greater than the first reference value. can occur.

Specifically, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007). ), the first addition object value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the first addition target value, and the increment of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the first addition target value. Decrease.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and greater than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the total counter 168 ( Step S2010), the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the second addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the second addition target value. Decrease.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the third addition target value is added from the reflection counter 167 Subtract the value (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the third addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the third addition target value. Decrease.

When the process of step S2004 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S2005, when the process of step S2008 is executed, when the process of step S2011 is executed, or when the process of step S2013 is executed, the total counter The image data corresponding to the value of 168 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), the image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current value of the total counter 168 as the number display image G31 is drawn. set as a target. Parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

Next, how the number display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 56(a) shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound and light side MPU 62, FIG. 56(b) shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56(c) shows the number display image G31. Indicates update timing.

At the timing of t1, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "17" is set as the increment of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to "17" as shown in FIG. 56(b). However, since the timing t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

After that, at the timing of t2, it becomes the update timing of the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is "17", which is a larger value than the first reference value, as shown in FIG. "5" is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the value up to that point.

After that, at each of timing t3 and timing t4, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and is greater than the second reference value. 2 "3", which is the value to be added, is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the value up to that point.

Thereafter, at timing t5, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which "3" is set as the decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t5, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "3" by subtracting "3" from "6" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at timing t6 and timing t7, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the value up to that point.

Thereafter, at timing t8, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "5" is set as the increment of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t8, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "6" by adding 5 from "1" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at timing t9, it is time to update the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is again greater than the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. ” is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the value up to that point.

After that, at timing t10, timing t12, and timing t13, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the value up to that point. At the timing of t11, the measurement command is transmitted as shown in FIG. 56(a). Since "0" is set in the measurement command as information on the increase/decrease in the number of acquisitions, the reflection counter 167 values are unchanged.

After that, at the timing of t14, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). The value of the reflection counter 167 is maintained as it is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained as it is.

After that, at the timing of t15, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is a decrement measurement command in which "5" is set as the decrement of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "-5" by subtracting 5 from "0" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at timing t16, it is time to update the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, regardless of the value, it is reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions at once. Therefore, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

As described above, the number of game balls obtained after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed as a number display effect while being varied in accordance with the increase or decrease in the actual number of obtained balls, so that even during the opening/closing execution mode, Also, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired up to that time. In this case, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the number display image G31 is updated so as to increase the display of the acquired number can be easily continued for a long time, and the acquired number increases in the open/close execution mode. It becomes easy to give the player the impression of being there.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the obtained number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31. The value to be added to the acquired number at each update timing is a small value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increment of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from becoming extremely large without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes equal to or less than the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 is changed after that. When the value is greater than the first reference value, the situation returns to the situation where the first addition object value is added to the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. As a result, it is possible to update the display of the acquired number in an appropriate manner for the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquired items, regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167, the value of the decrease is collectively displayed in the number display image G31. This is reflected in the number display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period in which the display of the acquired number is updated to decrease from continuing for a long time. Further, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, it becomes possible to clear the value of the reflection counter 167 to "0" at one update timing of the number display image G31. It is possible to make the value of the counter 167 to easily become a positive value. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the display of the acquired number to be updated so as to increase.

<Another form of number display effect>
・Instead of transmitting the prize ball completion command from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 to the sound and light side MPU 62, when the prize ball command is transmitted to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the same prize ball command is sent to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55. It may be configured to transmit to the side MPU 62 . In this case, the number of game balls that are not actually paid out but are scheduled to be paid out will be added to the display of the acquired number.

・The number of game balls to be launched detected by the shooting ball detection sensor 155 and the number of game balls to return detected by the return ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the number of acquired balls. One or both of them may be configured not to be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

・The number display effect is configured to start when the opening period starts in the open/close execution mode, but instead, it starts when the opening period ends and the first round game round starts. may be configured.

・The number display effect is configured to end when the opening and closing execution mode ends once, but if the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the number display effect will be in the high frequency support mode. is continued, and when the opening/closing execution mode occurs a plurality of times without intervening the low-frequency support mode, the number of acquired game balls after the start of the first opening/closing execution mode is continuously displayed. may be In addition, when the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the number display effect is continued in the high probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode is generated multiple times without interposing the low probability mode. In this case, the number of acquired game balls after the start of the first opening/closing execution mode may be continuously displayed.

・It is possible to identify whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and depending on whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, the number display image G31 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value to be added to the acquired number changes at one update timing of . For example, even if the values to be added to the obtained number are the same, the number display image G31 needs to be updated once more when the firing operation is performed than when the firing operation is not performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the value to be added to the acquired number at the timing becomes a large value or tends to become a large value, or may become a small value or tends to become a small value. A touch sensor for detecting that the player is touching the shooting operation device 28 is used as a configuration that can identify whether or not the shooting operation is being performed on the shooting operation device 28. may be provided to specify that a firing operation is being performed when the touch sensor is ON. A configuration that specifies that the firing operation is being performed when the detection result of the variable resistor corresponds to the result that the rotation operation amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. may be

<Another form of number display effect>
· The object to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the acquired number of game balls in the open/close execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in a slot machine, when the number of remaining continuous games in an advantageous gaming state such as an RT game, an AT game, or an ART game that is advantageous to the player can increase in the middle of the advantageous gaming state, the remaining continuation game is displayed as a number display effect. A configuration may be adopted in which an increasing display effect is executed to show how the number of games is increasing. Arithmetic processing for increasing display executed by the display CPU 72 for performing the increasing display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When an opportunity to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state occurs, an increase display effect is started. If it is time to start the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), the target increase value is divided (step S2102). In the target increase value division process, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by a predetermined division value of "100". Multiple types of target increase values are set, and each of these multiple types of target increase values is set so that the quotient value when divided by the division value is 8 or less, and when divided by the division value are set so that the values of the quotients of are different from each other. Specifically, "50", "100" and "250" are set as the target increase values. When the target increase value is "50", the result of division by the division value is a quotient of "0" and a remainder of "50", and when the target increase value is "100", division is performed by the division value. The result is a quotient of "1" and a remainder of "0", and when the target increase value is "250", the result of division by the division value is a quotient of "2" and a remainder of "50".

When division processing of the target increase value is executed, a value obtained by adding "1" to the quotient value derived by the division processing is stored in the work RAM 73 as a unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value for increasing the display of the remaining number of continuous games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display effect at one update timing of the display. Since the quotient of the result of division by the division value differs depending on the type of target increase value as described above, the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of target increase value.

After that, the setting processing of the unit increase counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated in the current increase display effect. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the quotient value calculated by the division is set in the unit increment counter. For example, when the target increase value is "250", the unit increase value is "3", and when the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is "83" and the remainder is "1". In this case, "83" is set in the unit increment counter. If the remainder after dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value is 1 or more, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as the remaining value (step S2105).

When the process of step S2105 is executed, or when it is time to update the increase display effect (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). If the value of the unit increase counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increase value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when the number of remaining games to be played is displayed as the game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as the game number image. Incidentally, when the increase display effect is started, the remaining number of continuous games at that time is set in the total counter.

In step S2108, the unit increase value is added to the current value of the total counter, thereby increasing the value of the number-of-games image from the current value by the unit increase value. After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the unit increase counter (step S2109).

If the value of the unit increment counter is "0" (step S2107: NO), on condition that the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES), the remaining value is added to the total counter ( step S2111). As a result, the value of the number-of-games image increases from the current value by the remaining value.

When the process of step S2109 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, or when the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), the image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current total counter value as the number-of-games image is included as the drawing target. set. Parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

According to the above configuration, when an effect is executed to increase the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state, the unit increase value varies according to the target increase value, so the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games is increased at each update timing of the number-of-games image.

In addition, even in the case of diversifying the manner of increasing the number of continuous games in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the number-of-games image are The processing configuration for updating is the same regardless of the type of target increment value. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Further, since the unit increase value is set according to the target increase value, it is possible for the player to predict the target increase value by checking the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the update mode of the number-of-games image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increase display effect.

It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of division values for executing the division processing of the target increase value (step S2102), and execute the division processing using the division value determined by lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the mode of increase in the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image when the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games.

<Structure for Pseudo-Animation Effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a pseudo moving image effect will be described.

The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which moving image display is performed on the symbol display device 41 over the period of the pseudo moving image effect. During the pseudo-moving effect period, the image update timings at which at least a part of the image displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed occur a plurality of specific update times (eg, 600 times). At each update timing of the image during the pseudo-moving effect period, one piece of still image data 171 to 173 to be used at the update timing is drawn on the entire frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. , an image based on the one piece of still image data 171 to 173 is displayed over the entire pattern display device 41 . In this case, the number of pieces of still image data 171 to 173 to be used during the pseudo moving image presentation period is smaller than the specific number of updates.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 stores first character image data 171 and effect image data 172 as still image data 171 to 173 for executing pseudo moving image effects. , second character image data 173 are stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59A, the first character image data 171 includes, as the first character image G41, a first pseudo moving image character G42 representing a person and a first pseudo moving image character G42. A pattern display device 41 displays a second pseudo-moving character G43 representing a person different from a person, and a pseudo-moving background G44 displayed behind the first pseudo-moving character G42 and the second pseudo-moving character G43. This is image data to be displayed on the whole. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

As for the effect image data 172, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(b), a light beam image G47 is displayed as an effect image G45 in front of an effect background G46, and represents a state in which light is emitted from a light source to the surroundings. This is image data for displaying the image on the entire pattern display device 41 . The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing the visual effect. In addition to the light beam image G47, an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, and an aura that makes the surroundings of the character appear to emit light. An image etc. are mentioned. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating images.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(c), the second character image data 173 includes, as a second character image G48, a first pseudo moving image character G42 and a first 2 Image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G43 and the pseudo moving image background G44 over the entire pattern display device 41. FIG. The second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

However, the display mode of the first pseudo-moving character G42 and the second pseudo-moving character G43 based on the second character image data 173 is the same as that of the first pseudo-moving character G42 and the second pseudo-moving image G42 based on the first character image data 171. The display mode is different from that of the character G43. Specifically, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, the orientation of the body region representing the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, etc., which are a partial region of the first pseudo-animation character G42, are determined by the first character. The second character image G41 and the second character image G48 are different. In addition, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, the direction of the body region representing the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, etc., which are a partial region of the second pseudo-moving character G43, are the same as the first character image G41. and the second character image G48.

Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, there is no continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42, and similarly there is continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43. There is no The lack of continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo-moving character G42 means that the shape of the predetermined area such as the hand area of the first pseudo-moving character G42 in the second character image G48 and the shape of the predetermined area and the first pseudo-moving character G48. It means that the relative position of the moving image character G42 with respect to other areas is different from the aspect at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display aspect of the first character image G41. Similarly, the lack of continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo-moving character G43 means that the shape of the predetermined area such as the hand area of the second pseudo-moving character G43 in the second character image G48 and the predetermined area and the other area of the second pseudo-moving-image character G43 is different from the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41.

A second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. As a result, compared to the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed, each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is displayed. The discontinuity between the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. The pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the third display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Therefore, while using the character image data 171 and 173 in which the number of the character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing and the motions of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are not continuous, the pseudo moving image data 171 and 173 It is possible to make the player recognize that animation display of animation characters G42 and G43 is being performed.

During the first display period during which the first character image G41 is displayed, the second display period during which the effect image G45 is displayed, and the third display period during which the second character image G48 is displayed, image update timing occurs multiple times. Each display period is the same period. In the configuration in which the image update timing occurs multiple times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period is of one type, as already described. Only. However, in each display period, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the range to be drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b is sequentially changed. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173 are made different.

When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written in all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are stored in the memory module 74 in sizes larger than the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b. number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by each of the image data 171 to 173 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both horizontal and vertical dimensions. As a result, it is possible to vary the range to be drawn in one type of image data 171 to 173 that is used in each display period. Furthermore, even if the range to be drawn in the one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used is made different in this way, the one type of image data 171 to 173 is used in the entire pattern display device 41. It is possible to display an image corresponding to

The sizes of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory module 74 are the same. The manner in which the areas to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 are made different is the same in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, the range of the image data 171 to 173 to be used is set as the range to be drawn, which is shifted toward a predetermined corner side. Then, at the subsequent image update timing, the change mode of the range to be drawn is changed so that the range to be drawn gradually moves toward the corner opposite to the predetermined corner angle. is set.

Data for changing the range to be drawn is pre-stored in the memory module 74 as a pseudo moving image table 174, as shown in FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, in the pseudo moving image table 174, pointer information with serial numbers is set, and drawing range information for determining the drawing target range is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information. . The pointer information is set for the number of image update timings occurring in each display period. Accordingly, by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period, it is possible to derive the drawing range information corresponding to all the update timings. In addition, since the pseudo-moving image table 174 is used in each display period, the pseudo-moving image table 174 can be stored in advance compared to the configuration in which the pseudo-moving image table 174 is prepared in advance corresponding to each display period. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the data.

FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how the pseudo moving image effect is executed. 62(a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62(b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62(c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62(d) is used in each display period. It shows how the drawing target range of the target image data 171 to 173 is changed.

The first display period is started as shown in FIG. 62(a) by starting the pseudo moving image effect at the timing of t1. The first display period continues from the timing t1 to the timing t2. During this period, as shown in FIG. It changes gradually while having a certain direction.

At the timing t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(a) and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(b). The second display period continues from the timing t2 to the timing t3. During this period, as shown in FIG. It is gradually changed while having sex. This directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between consecutive update timings are the same as in the case of the first display period.

At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(b) and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(c). The third display period continues from timing t3 to timing t4. During this period, as shown in FIG. It changes gradually while having a certain direction. This directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period and the second display period.

A specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be described below. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a pseudo moving image effect executed by the display CPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the pseudo moving image effect should be executed.

If it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). The display CPU 72 reads from the memory module 74 an execution object table for controlling the overall flow of the pseudo moving image effect when starting the pseudo moving image effect. It is specified whether it corresponds to the display period and whether it is the start timing of each display period.

If it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2203 is executed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2204). Also, the rendering range information set in correspondence with the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2205). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information to be referenced is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2207).

When the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the first character image data 171 is set as a drawing object in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). be done. Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S2205 and S2206 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo-moving image table 174 already read into the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo-moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the second display period.

If a negative determination is made in step S2209, or if the process of step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2211). Also, the rendering range information set in correspondence with the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2212). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information to be referenced is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2214).

When the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S2212 and S2213 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). If it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo-moving image table 174 already read into the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set in association with the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the third display period.

When a negative determination is made in step S2215, or when the process of step S2216 is executed, the second character image data 173 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2217). Also, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2218). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information to be referenced is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2220).

When the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the second character image data 173 is set as a drawing object in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). be done. Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S2218 and S2219 is set in the drawing list.

Here, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are individually used in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of round effects executed during different round games in the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode. . FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for round effects executed by the display CPU 72 . In addition, the arithmetic processing for round effect is executed in the arithmetic processing for effect in step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the round effect should be executed.

If it is the execution period of the first round game (step S2301: YES), the first character image data 171 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2302), and other image data is used as image data to be used this time. grasp (step S2303). After that, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2304). When the arithmetic processing for the round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) contains the first character image data 171 and the Image data is set as a drawing target. Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the execution period of the eighth round game (step S2305: YES), the image data for the second character 173 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2306), and other image data is image data to be used this time. (step S2307). After that, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the arithmetic processing for the round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) contains the second character image data 173 and the Image data is set as a drawing target. Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

In addition, when it is not the first round game and the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as image data to be used.

As described above, the second display period during which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between the first display period during which the first character image G41 is displayed and the third display period during which the second character image G48 is displayed. ing. As a result, compared to the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed, each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is displayed. The discontinuity between the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. The pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the second display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Therefore, while using the character image data 171 and 173 in which the number of the character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing and the motions of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are not continuous, the pseudo moving image data 171 and 173 It is possible to make the player recognize that animation display of animation characters G42 and G43 is being performed.

In particular, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are image data prepared for displaying images for round effects in different round games. Continuity of movement of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 are generated with the display period of the effect image G45 interposed therebetween as described above, so that the image for the round effect can be displayed. Using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for display, it is possible to execute a pseudo-moving effect.

The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. This makes it possible to display moving images while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

A pseudo-moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo-moving effect in the frame areas 82a and 82b is also used in each display period. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects described above while suppressing the required storage capacity of the memory module 74 .

<Another form of pseudo-movie production>
The configuration is not limited to two types of character image data 171 and 173 for displaying the respective pseudo-moving-image characters G42 and G43, and three or more types may be used. For example, in addition to the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, the respective pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed, and the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 are each pseudo moving image data. The memory module 74 may store in advance third character image data for different display modes of the moving image characters G42 and G43. In this case, as the pseudo moving image effect period, the first display period during which the first character image data 171 is used, the second display period during which the effect image data 172 is used, and the second character image data 173 are used. There are a third display period to be used, a fourth display period to use the effect image data 172 or different effect image data, and a fifth display period to use the third character image data. It will be done.

・The respective display periods of the pseudo-moving effect are not limited to the same period, and although the display periods are different from each other, they may be substantially the same period. At least one of the display periods may be configured to be a period significantly different from the other display periods. For example, although the first display period and the second display period are the same or substantially the same period, the effect period may be longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. When each display period is different from each other, by creating the pseudo moving image table 174 so as to correspond to all the update timings of the display period that is the longest period among the display periods, this display period can also be used in the other display periods. The pseudo moving image table 174 can also be used.

If the drawing range information derived from the pseudo-moving image table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, it is assumed that the pseudo-moving image table 174 is used multiple times during one display period in the pseudo-moving effect. does not cause any discomfort. In this case, it is not necessary to set the data corresponding to the entire one display period in the pseudo moving image table 174, and it is sufficient to set only the data corresponding to a part of the one display period. be.

The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are configured to be larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b at the initial magnification size stored in the memory module 74. Without limitation, the size of the initial magnification is the same size as or smaller than the frame areas 82a and 82b, and after being read from the memory module 74, it is enlarged to a size larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b. A configuration in which processing is executed may be employed. In this case, when the images for the round effect are to be displayed, the image data for the first character 171 and the image data for the second character 173 are used in the size of the initial magnification, and the images for the pseudo moving image effect are displayed. When used for display, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 may be used in a size enlarged from the size of the initial magnification.

The method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect to the frame areas 82a and 82b at each update timing is to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173. It is not limited to how the ranges differ. For example, a method may be adopted in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually narrowed so that the image to be displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, a method may be used in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually widened so that the image to be displayed is gradually reduced.

・In the first display period of the pseudo-moving effect, the first character image data 171 is not the only image data to be used. After drawing in the areas 82a and 82b, other image data may be drawn in a partial range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the first character image G41 is displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 is displayed between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48. By displaying them, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the moving images of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

<Another form of pseudo-movie production>
・The modes shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) are also conceivable as modes of the pseudo-moving effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(c), a pseudo-moving image character G51 is displayed in the pseudo-moving effect. As image data for displaying the pseudo-moving image character G51, first pseudo-moving image data and second pseudo-moving image data are stored in advance in the memory module 74, and the first pseudo-moving image data is used. As shown in FIG. 65(a), the first pseudo-moving image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(a), and the second pseudo-moving image data is displayed as shown in FIG. A pseudo moving image G53 is displayed.

In the first pseudo-moving image G52, as shown in FIG. 65(a), a state before the predetermined parts G51a (more specifically, both arms) of the pseudo-moving character G51 move along a predetermined motion path is displayed. As shown in FIG. 65(c), the pseudo-moving image G53 displays a state after the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 moves along a predetermined motion path. However, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53 is separated to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of the movement. .

On the other hand, between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53, a pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b). . In this pseudo moving image effect image G54, many small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. In addition, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed for a predetermined period, and during the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a are displayed in the moving direction along the predetermined movement path in the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51. The animation is displayed so that it moves in the same direction as the

With the above configuration, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53 makes it difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. Even if the configuration is such that the distance between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 is due to the visual effect of the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo moving image effect image G54, It is possible to make the player recognize that the predetermined portion G51a has moved along the predetermined motion path. As a result, even in a configuration in which the number of pieces of pseudo-moving image data for displaying the pseudo-moving character G51 is small, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53 is displayed. While making the discontinuity of the positions of .

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the electrical configuration regarding display control. Differences from the first embodiment will be described below. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. In addition, the main controller 50 includes a payout controller 55 that controls a payout device 56, and a power supply/controller that functions to supply power to each device including the main controller 50 and to drive and control the game ball shooting mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the special figure unit 37 displaying the result of the game cycle, and the general figure unit 38 displaying the result of the general electric open lottery are electrically connected. In addition, an audio light emission control device 60 is provided that drives and controls the display light emission unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 50. A display control device 200 is provided for controlling the pattern display device 41 based on the above.

As shown in FIG. 66, the display control device 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. .

The display CPU 201 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected via a bus to an input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207. be done.

The display CPU 201 is connected to a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, and a VRAM 204 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Give transfer instructions. Further, the display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the pattern display device 41. conduct. The memory module 203, work RAM 202, VRAM 204 and VDP 205 will be described below.

The memory module 203 pre-stores control data including a control program and fixed value data, and pre-stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 203 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 203 is used as a read-only memory (ROM) for non-write when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 203 include object data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, texture data pasted on the object data, and the backmost image in one frame image. and the image data for the back side that constitutes the image of the .

Here, object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, since a surface model is applied to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. In other words, each object data three-dimensionally defines the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of object data. By pasting texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image including patterns and characters, for example, is generated. Texture data may be stored in any manner, but may include at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette that is referenced when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The image data for the back surface may be held in any manner, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-like object data (that is, plate polygons) is used.

The work RAM 202 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 203 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203 . Then, the display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 204 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 41 . The VRAM 204 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 204 has an expansion buffer 211 , and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203 . The VRAM 204 is also provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205 .

The VDP 205 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the pattern display device 41 based on drawing instructions from the display CPU 201, using data stored in the expansion buffer 211, specifically by processing the data. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the pattern display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 205 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation section 221 , a rendering section 222 , a register 223 and a display circuit 225 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 and the I/F 227 for the VRAM 204 .

The I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 causes the register 223 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201 . The geometry calculation unit 221 reads various image data stored in the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223 . Also, the geometry calculation unit 221 arranges the object data designated as the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Also, the geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display plane P.

Based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, the rendering unit 222 performs light source adjustment and pastes texture data on each clipped object data to determine the appearance of the object data. The rendering unit 222 also projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information to convert one frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, into a frame. Create in buffer 212 . Drawing data for one frame is data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

It should be noted that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be provided by a drawing list. , the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may perform processing depending on the contents of . Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 203 in advance. Alternatively, the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute processing only by operation of hardware circuits corresponding to the drawing list without using programs.

Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame region 212a and a second frame region 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 212 is provided with the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b, drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 41. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is executed. That is, the frame buffer 212 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 225, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212a or the second frame area 212b. It is output to the pattern display device 41 through the connected output port 208 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 225 from the frame regions 212 a and 212 b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

<Basic processing in display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in this embodiment. In the V interrupt process, if this is the timing to start power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all the texture data pre-stored in the memory module 203 are stored in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. The texture area 211a is read out (step S2402).

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the processing of step S2402 is executed, command analysis processing is executed (step S2403). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives the strobe signal from the sound and light side MPU 62, it executes the command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In command interrupt processing, commands received at the input port 207 are transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 202 .

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S2404: YES), the command correspondence process is executed (step S2405). In the command correspondence processing, an execution object table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203 . The execution target table is a group of information that defines the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the received command on the pattern display device 41 . be.

The commands received by the display CPU 201 from the sound and light side MPU 62 are, as in the first embodiment, a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of notice effect, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, There are a command at the start of fixed effect, a command at the start of standby display, a command at the time of start of fixed display, and the like. When these commands are received, an execution object table necessary for executing the game round effects corresponding to each of these commands on the symbol display device 41 is read.

When a negative determination is made in step S2404, or when the processing of step S2405 is executed, task processing is executed (step S2406). In the task processing, by referring to the control data for the current processing in the data table set as the object to be used, a rendering instruction is issued to the VDP 205 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time. Set the various data required above. Specifically, as the various data, the address information of the area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 203, the address information of the area to transfer the image data to be controlled in the VRAM 204, and the image data to be controlled are used. There are information on the target frame areas 212a and 212b for which drawing data should be created by using a virtual three-dimensional space, and various information for creating a 3D image using the virtual three-dimensional space.

After that, drawing list output processing is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to this drawing list.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing task processing in step S2406.

In task processing, first, setting processing for starting control is executed (step S2501). In the control start setting process, the display CPU 201 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in this processing. Note that the individual image refers to a 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data, or a 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. That is.

Specifically, regarding the control start setting processing, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 202 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Allocate a free buffer area so that Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the secured empty buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to individual images are set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation process, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, the rotation angle, the scale, the light information for adding contrast, and the projection for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character are calculated. A process of computing and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as camera information and Z-test designation, is executed.

After that, a production calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, the various parameters described above are calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as ready-to-win display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

After that, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for the image of the symbol that is the object of variable display in each game cycle.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S2503 to S2505, a process of updating the parameters for starting control set in step S2501 is executed. Also, in each of the processes of steps S2503 to S2505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image is updated is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is pre-stored in the memory module 203 and pre-transferred to the work RAM 202 before the display CPU 201 needs to read the data.

After that, a process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list is grasped among the individual images that have become control update targets in the respective processes of steps S2503 to S2505. to run. The grasping is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since more individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 are set than individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 201 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 205 may be the same. In this case, the processing of step S2506 is executed. no longer needed.

<Basic processing in VDP 205>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

In the VDP 205, processing of setting the value of the register 223 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 201, processing of creating rendering data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the rendering list transmitted from the display CPU 201, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 . Also, the drawing data creation process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 . Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Before describing the processing, the contents of the rendering list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. 69(a) to 69(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information indicating which of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created for the one-frame image related to the drawing list is set. there is Various designation information is set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time. Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set to be serial numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 69(a), the background image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. there is In addition, the image data for effect is set after the image data for background, for example, object A for effect is set as m-th, object B for effect is m+1, and so on. there is In addition, the image data for the design is set as the order after the image data for the effect, for example, the design object A is set as the n-th, the design object B is set as the (n+1)th, and so on. there is

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the one described above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the order opposite to that described above. Image data for effect or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for design is set in order between predetermined image data for effect and other image data for effect. may have been

In the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), ..., P(m), P(m+1), ..., P(n), P(n+1), ... , multiple types of parameter information are set. Specifically, regarding the parameter information P(1) of the image data for the rear surface, as shown in FIG. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back, and world coordinates when setting the image data for the back Rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle in the system, scale information that indicates the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system with respect to the scale that is set as the initial state of the image data for the back, and and uniform α value information indicating overall transparency information (or transparency information) when image data is set.

Here, coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Also, this coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 during texture mapping.

The parameter information (P1) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and direction of the virtual camera when projecting the image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for rendering, and the image data for the back. and light information, including position and orientation information of a virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case.

The parameter information (P1) contains Z-test designation information indicating whether or not the Z-buffer method, which is a type of method for removing hidden surfaces, is applied. In the Z-buffer method, when many objects and two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) lined up on the Z-axis This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also used as a method for removing hidden surfaces. The Z-sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel arranged on the Z-axis is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 212a and 212b. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In such a state, addition processing of the numerical information and arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although a detailed description of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is to be displayed.

The parameter information (P1) includes α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is to be applied and to whom it is applied, and fog designation information indicating whether or not fog is to be applied and to which fog is to be applied.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As methods for setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. A uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in the memory module 203 in advance as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

By setting the uniform α value and α data as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data can be uniformly controlled for all pixels rather than finely controlled for each pixel. In a situation where it is sufficient, the necessary data capacity can be reduced by being able to deal with a uniform α value, and by applying the α data, it is also possible to finely control the degree of transparency for each pixel.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically in the Z-axis direction, in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object placed on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained, so another fog is set for the object. configuration. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

In other parameters such as parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 69(c), among the various information in FIG. information and is set. As such information, address information of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 203 is set.

Rendering processing in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed (step S2602).

In the background setting process, the background image data for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, an empty buffer area to be referred to for arranging in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and when an empty buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. After that, the address at which the image data is stored in the memory module 203 is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data are set so as to achieve the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list. to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and set in the buffer area secured above.

If so, the various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area are updated. In the background setting process, a control end process is executed to erase background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, setting processing for effect is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, the object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

After that, a design setting process is executed (step S2604). In the design setting process, the object data for displaying the design is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the design setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for a design not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604, as shown in FIG. 71, the drawing list designates the drawing list as a placement target within the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the backmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles and scales also designated by the drawing list is completed. FIG. 71 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set with the viewpoint as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, a viewpoint PC11 indicated by a camera shape is set, and a corresponding coordinate system is set.

Here, camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it becomes possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

Thereafter, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the transformation process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is transformed into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image closer to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image farther from the viewpoint is reduced.

Thereafter, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, the respective individual images extracted in step S2606 are grasped with their respective corresponding viewpoints as a common origin. In that state, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame areas 212a and 212b (that is, the pattern display device 41) to be drawn. to clip.

After that, lighting processing is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows and reflections are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

Thereafter, color information setting processing is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing is executed to paste texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping processing. Also, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are performed.

Thereafter, in steps S2610 and S2611, each individual image extracted in step S2607 and for which lighting processing and color information setting processing have been completed is projected onto the screen region PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, drawing data creation processing for effect and background is executed (step S2610). In the rendering data creation process for the effect and background, the image data for the backmost image set as the background image and the object data are projected onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal. Create drawing data for Drawing data for rendering is created by projecting onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the object data set as the rendering image.

Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214 as shown in FIG. A buffer and a design buffer into which design drawing data is written are set. Areas with the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 are set in the rendering and background buffers and the pattern buffer. The background drawing data and effect drawing data created in step S2610 are stored in the effect and background buffers in such a manner that the effect drawing data is overwritten in a part of the background drawing data. written. If the background image data is not specified in the drawing list, the background drawing data will not be created. Drawing data is not created.

After that, drawing data creation processing for design is executed (step S2611). In the process of creating drawing data for a design, object data set as a design is projected onto the screen area PC 12 while removing hidden surfaces. Create drawing data. If the image data for the design is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the design is not created.

After that, drawing data synthesis processing is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesizing process, the effect and background drawing data created in the screen buffer 214 individually by the processing in steps S2610 and S2611 are synthesized with the design drawing data, and the synthesized result is obtained. One frame of drawing data is written in the drawing target frame areas 212a and 212b.

In this case, the writing order is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for effects and background→drawing data for symbols. Therefore, drawing data for effect and background are first written into the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, and then drawing data for symbols are written. At this time, if the target pixel for drawing has a completely transparent α value, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is changed. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side overwrites the image on the back side. , the operations for blending are performed.

Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area of one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion where projection is not performed in the drawing data for design.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data. This is performed in parallel with the generation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the corresponding frame. The display circuit 225 has a selector circuit for alternately switching between the frame regions 212a and 212b to be referenced each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 212a and 212b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S2602 to S2607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221, and steps S2608 to S2612 are processes executed by the rendering unit 222. FIG.

<Configuration for performing time-based production>
Next, the configuration for performing the time-based production will be described.

The time-dependent effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-dependent effect state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) each time a predetermined time is reached. As the predetermined times, for example, it is conceivable that they are set at intervals of one hour, such as 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, and so on. Further, specifically, regarding the time-dependent effect state, the background image corresponding to the time is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 are also time-dependent. form. Further, in the case of the effect state corresponding to the time, the special corresponding image can be displayed in the game round resulting in the big win, or the probability that the special corresponding image is displayed in the game round resulting in the big win is determined according to the time. It will be higher than in the non-production state. By configuring the pachinko machine 10 to be in a performance state corresponding to the time at a predetermined time, for example, when a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be played. , it is possible to perform the time corresponding production at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 66, the sound emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65 in order to enable execution of the time-dependent presentation. The RTC 65 can output time information to the sound and light side MPU 62 . The RTC 65 has its own backup power supply, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. By acquiring time information from the RTC 65 as necessary, the sound and light side MPU 62 can specify whether or not the time at the acquisition timing is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time-based effect. Then, when the time information obtained from the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time corresponding production, the sound and light side MPU 62 executes processing for starting the time corresponding production.

How the time-based effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. FIG. 72(a) shows a normal period, which is a period during which the time-based production is not executed, FIG. 72(b) shows a preparation period, which is a part of the time-dependent production execution period, and FIG. 72(c) A special period which is a part of the execution period of the performance corresponding to the time and starts after the preparation period is shown. Also, FIG. 73(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the normal period, and FIG. 73(b) is an explanation for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period. FIG. 73(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 at the timing of t1 in the normal period in which the time-based production is not executed becomes the time information corresponding to the timing for starting the time-based production. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), the normal period ends and the preparation period starts at the timing t1. As a result, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73(a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b). .

In the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, the content of the background image displayed in the background image differs, and the type of the individual background image displayed in front of the background image. is different. Specifically, while there are two individual background images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period, individual background images G62a to G62a to G62b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are displayed. There are four G62d. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the preparation period than during the normal period, and it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the symbol display device 41 . Further, during the preparation period, the pattern display device 41 displays a remaining time notification image G63 for notifying information corresponding to the remaining time until the start of the special period. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. Although the pattern display mode is the same between the normal period and the preparation period, the pattern display mode may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c), the preparation period ends and the special period starts at the timing t2. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73(c). .

The display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period differ in the content of the background image displayed in the background image, and the type of individual background image displayed in front of the background image. is different. Specifically, the number of individual background images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period is four, whereas the individual background images G64a to G64a to G64d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period are four. There are seven G64g. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the special period than during the preparation period, and the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. Also, during the special period, a special notification image G65 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for notifying that it is the special period. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that it is the special period. Although the pattern display mode is the same between the preparation period and the special period, the pattern display mode may be changed.

At the timing t3 when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72(c) and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72(a). . After that, the time corresponding effect is executed at each of timing t4 to timing t6 and timing t7 to timing t9. In this case, the period from when the time-based effect is started in a predetermined execution time to when the time-based effect is started in the next time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period is also constant at Tf2 in each execution time of the performance corresponding to the time. As a result, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can simultaneously start time-dependent performances, and a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can simultaneously start a special period.

As described above, the time-based effect is executed periodically using the time information of the RTC 65. However, when the start timing of the time-based effect occurs during the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode continues. During this period, the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as the background image of the pattern display device 41. The backmost image for the period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are not displayed. However, during the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the opening/closing execution mode image, and during the special period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in front of a part of the opening/closing execution mode image. The special notification image G65 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the . As a result, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is preferentially executed, thereby appropriately increasing the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, while notifying the player that the performance corresponding to the time is being executed. It is possible to recognize. In addition, even during the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp that the execution period of the performance corresponding to the time is in effect, and to compare the plurality of pachinko machines 10 and detect any abnormality in the RTC 65.例文帳に追加It is possible to perform the work of confirming whether or not it has occurred regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

On the other hand, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 become the mode corresponding to the time from the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time even in the open/close execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the display light-emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 can be aligned in a manner corresponding to the time in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 .

When the opening and closing execution mode ends in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode is the start timing of the time-based presentation and the period during which the time-based presentation is normally executed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If there is, display of the background image for the preparation period and individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as the background image of the pattern display device 41 is started, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. Further, if the opening/closing execution mode end timing corresponds to the special period, the backmost image for the special period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are used as the background image of the pattern display device 41. While the display is started, the display of the special notification image G65 is continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-dependent effect in the original execution mode.

The maximum duration of the opening and closing execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. As a result, when it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time during the opening/closing execution mode, the execution mode corresponding to the time is terminated in the middle of the execution of the performance corresponding to the time. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-dependent effect in the original execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest continuous period of the opening/closing execution mode may be longer than the execution period of the time-based effect.

When it is time to start the time-dependent effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the time-dependent effect is not executed in the state where the effect for the game cycle is not executed and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. The start mode of the production corresponding to the time is different from that when the production start timing comes. Specifically, when it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display mode of the effect for the game round is continued. In other words, the display of the background image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as the background image of the pattern display device 41 is not started. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for the game round. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the pattern so as not to reduce the visibility of the pattern.

Hereinafter, how the time-based effect is executed in relation to the execution status of the effect for the game cycle will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 75 . FIG. 75(a) shows the start timing of the time-based effect, and FIG. 75(b) shows the period during which the demo display is executed when neither the effect for the game cycle nor the effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed. , FIG. 75(c) shows the execution period of the effect for the game round, FIG. 75(d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75(e) shows the image display as shown in FIG. FIG. 75(f) shows the display period of the preparation period image in which an image as shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed as a background image, FIG. 75(g) shows the special period, and FIG. (h) indicates a light emission control period corresponding to time.

First, a description will be given of a case where the timing for starting the time-based effect is reached while the effect for the game cycle and the effect for the open/close execution mode are not being executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), at the timing t1 in the execution period of the demonstration display, as shown in FIG. 75(a), it becomes the start timing of the time-based effect. In this case, at the timing t1, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the display of the preparation period image starts as shown in FIG. 75(f). Also, at the timing t1, the display light-emitting section 44 starts to emit light corresponding to the time as shown in FIG. 75(h). At the timing t1, the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a manner corresponding to the time.

After that, at the timing t2, which is in the middle of the preparation period, an effect for the game cycle is started as shown in FIG. 75(c). In this case, while the background image for the preparation period is being displayed, the variable display of the symbols is started. In other words, the variable display of the pattern is started while the background image for the preparatory period continues to be displayed in accordance with the previous display pattern.

After that, at the timing of t3 during execution of the effect for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started while the variable display of the symbols according to the previous display pattern is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(b), at the timing of t4 where the demo display is being executed, the execution period guaranteed as the special period elapses, and as shown in FIG. 75(g) The special period ends, and along with that, the time corresponding production for this execution time ends. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting unit 44 stops emitting light according to the time. It should be noted that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in the time-dependent mode at the timing t4. In addition, when the execution period guaranteed as the special period has passed in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the effect for the game cycle ends and the effect for the game cycle is newly started. The special period ends when the

Next, a description will be given of a case where it is time to start the time-based effect while the effect for the game cycle is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), at the timing of t5 in the execution period of the performance for game round, as shown in FIG. 75(a), it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding performance. In this case, at the timing t5, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(d), but the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) does not start. , the mid-delay period is started as shown in FIG. 75(e). In the mid-delay period, as already described, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display for the game round effect according to the display pattern up to that point is continued.

On the other hand, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light-emitting section 44 starts to emit light corresponding to the time. At the timing t5, the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a manner corresponding to the time. As a result, the display mode of the display light-emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 can be aligned in a manner corresponding to the time in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 .

Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the effect for the game round which has been executed until then ends, and at the timing of t7, a new effect for the game round is started. At the timing t7, the mid-delay period ends as shown in FIG. 75(e), and the background image for the preparation period starts to be displayed as shown in FIG. 75(f). In other words, when the timing for starting the time-based effect is reached during the execution of the effect for the game cycle, the background image for the preparation period is not displayed as a delay period until the effect for the game cycle ends. When the performance for the game cycle ends and the performance for the new game cycle is started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started. Further, when the effect for the game cycle is finished and the effect for the new game cycle is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demonstration display is started. As a result, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started during the period from the end of the effect for the game round to the start of the new effect for the game round or the start of the demonstration display. can be used as a control period for The demo display is started when 0.5 sec has passed without starting a new game-playing effect or opening/closing execution mode effect after the game-playing effect is finished.

After that, at the timing of t8 during execution of the effect for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started while the variable display of the symbols according to the previous display pattern is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(b), at the timing of t9 in which the demonstration display is being executed, the execution period secured as the special period elapses, and as shown in FIG. 75(g) The special period ends, and along with that, the time corresponding production for this execution time ends. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting section 44 stops emitting light corresponding to the time. It should be noted that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in the time-dependent mode at the timing of t9.

When it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed as described above, the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image are kept in the display mode of the effect for the game cycle so far. Meanwhile, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for the game round. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the performance corresponding to the time is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the performance for the game cycle.

In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is to be started in a situation where the character image for ready-to-win is displayed as an effect for the game round, the image is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Since the number of types of image data used for processing becomes extremely large, there is a risk that the processing load will become extremely high. On the other hand, when it is time to start the time-based effect while the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the effect for the game cycle is already determined by simply adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image is maintained according to the contents of the This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

Here, the continuation period Tf3 of the preparation period is fixed, and the continuation period Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for the game round. As a result, even if it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the time-dependent effect is displayed regardless of the variable display time of the effect for the game cycle and the start timing of the time-based effect. The performance for the game round during execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing the period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, when the special period starts, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. display can be started. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the simultaneous start of display of the background image for the special period on a plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

Next, the data configuration for executing the time-based effect will be described.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76(a), the sound and light side ROM 63 stores in advance a data table 231 for time-based effects. The data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is a table referred to in order to perform execution control of the time corresponding effect in the sound and light side MPU 62 . FIG. 76(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect.

In the data table 231 for time-based presentation, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set. combination is set. By referring to various timing information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced, the start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, and the start timing of the special period. , the return timing of the image data group for normal effect, and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period can be specified by the sound and light side MPU 62 . In addition, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed using light emission data (PD(0), PD(1), . . . ) corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced. It is possible to make the lighting mode correspond to the time, and the sound output data (SD(0), SD(1) . By executing the sound output control, it is possible to make the output mode of the sound from the speaker section 45 correspond to the time.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, the memory module 203 of the display control device 200 stores a preparation period image data group 232, a special period image data group 233, a remaining time correspondence table 234, and a preparation period table 235. , a special notification correspondence table 236 and a special period table 237 are stored in advance. The preparation period image data group 232 includes image data for displaying the background image for the preparation period, image data for displaying the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and remaining time notification. It contains image data for displaying the image G63. The special period image data group 233 includes image data for displaying the background image for the special period, image data for displaying the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period, and a special notification image. Image data for displaying G65 is included.

The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for controlling the display of the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period regardless of whether it is a delay period or not. Parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set correspondingly. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the preparation period in the preparation period that is not the delay period. Parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the period is set. Since the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are provided separately, display control for the preparation period is performed during the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even during the preparation period. By referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, during a period other than the delay period, which is the preparation period, by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235, the remaining time is notified in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. It becomes possible to display the image G63.

The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 during the special period regardless of whether the opening/closing execution mode is set. Parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set correspondingly. The special period table 237 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the special period in the special period that is not in the opening/closing execution mode. Parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the special period is set. By providing the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 separately, even if it is a special period, during a period in which the background image for the special period is not displayed, display control for the special period can be performed. By referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236, it is possible to display the special notification image G65 in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the special period and not in the opening/closing execution mode, by referring to both the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237, the special notification is performed in the situation where the background image for the special period is displayed. It becomes possible to display the image G65.

As already explained, the special period will end when the execution period secured as the special period has passed, but if the effect for the game cycle is being executed or the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is executed When the execution period secured as a special period has passed in the case where it is, the effect for the game cycle in the middle of the execution or the effect for the open/close execution mode ends and the effect for the game cycle starts anew. or when the demo display is started anew. Then, when the special period ends, the normal production returns. Corresponding to this, the special period table 237 is set so as to correspond to periods equal to or longer than the longest period in which the special period can continue. Thereby, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, the special period can be continued until the end timing occurs.

A specific processing configuration for executing the time-based presentation will be described below. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the RTC handling process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62. FIG. Note that the RTC support process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If it is time to start the preparation period (step S2701: YES), setting processing for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the preparation period start setting process, as shown in the flow chart of FIG. 79, first, the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S2801). After that, a command for instructing readout of the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU 201. FIG. Note that the command handling process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation period data read instruction command (step S2901: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the data other than the texture data from the preparation period image data group 232 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 from the memory module 203. transfer (step S2902). The texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period has been transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the processing in step S2902, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is stored in the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period regardless of whether or not the delay period starts when the preparation period starts. It is in a state of being read out to the expansion buffer 211 . This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period.

Returning to the description of the preparation period start setting process (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current situation is the delay target situation (step S2803). A situation in which the effect for the game cycle is being executed or a situation in which the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If the status is to be delayed (step S2803: YES), the delay flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S2804). The in-delay flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that it is the delay period. After that, a delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the delay command is received (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the remaining time correspondence table 234 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). As a result, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started on the pattern display device 41. FIG.

Returning to the description of the preparation period start setting process (FIG. 79), if the current situation is not the delay target state (step S2803: NO), the preparation display flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1". (Step S2806). The display flag for preparation is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. Thereafter, a preparatory display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display start command for preparation is received (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes read processing for the preparation period (step S2906). In the preparation period reading process, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has already been read into the work RAM 202, the preparation period table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 so that the remaining time correspondence is stored in the work RAM 202. Assume that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 have been read. In the preparation period reading process, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. . By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 to the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in a situation where the preparation period background image is being displayed.

Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78), if it is during the preparation period (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If "1" is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether or not it is time to cancel the delay (step S3004). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the effect for the game cycle ends and a new effect for the game cycle is started. is started or the demonstration display is started, it is determined that it is time to cancel the delay. In addition, if a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game is started. It is determined that it is time to release the delay when the performance for the round is started or when the demonstration display is started.

If it is time to cancel the delay (step S3004: YES), the delay flag in the sound and light side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3005), and the preparation display flag in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" ( step S3006). Thereafter, a preparatory display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing contents of the display CPU 201 when the display start command for preparation is received are as already explained.

In the setting process during the preparation period, if it is determined that it is time to transfer the data based on the data table 231 for the effect corresponding to the time (step S3002: YES), a special period data reading instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 ( step S3008). As shown in the flow chart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period data read instruction command (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 stores the data other than the texture data in the special period image data group 233 in the memory module. 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Note that the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the process of step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period has been read into the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 before the special period starts. This makes it possible to start displaying the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 early at the start of the special period, and to update the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 during the special period. This can be done smoothly.

Returning to the description of the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the preparation period based on the data table 231 for the time-based effect (step S3001: YES), the sound and light side RAM 64 is being delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and the special period flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that it is a special period. After that, a special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), it transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2909: YES). S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 to the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 is started on the pattern display device 41 regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is set. Also, if the situation is not the open/close execution mode, the background image for the special effect is started to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78), if it is during the special period (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), whether or not it is the data return timing is determined based on the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect. is determined (step S3102). If it is determined that it is time to restore the data (step S3102: YES), a normal period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80 , when the display CPU 201 receives the normal period data reading instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays the background image for the normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not being executed. Data other than the texture data in the image data group to be processed is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

Returning to the description of the setting process during the special period (FIG. 82), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period based on the data table 231 for the time-based effect (step S3101: YES), The process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the production corresponding to the time to the normal production. The possible return situation is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period, if the demonstration display is performed at the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period. If the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in , the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode being executed is terminated, and the effect for the game cycle is newly started. or the timing at which the demo display is started.

If it is possible to return (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and sound output control for the special period are terminated (step S3105). As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 in the normal effect mode in the situation where the time-related effect is not executed, and the speaker part 45 in the normal effect mode in the situation where the time-related effect is not executed. Sound output control is resumed. Thereafter, the special period flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3106), and a special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), the display CPU 201 displays a table for displaying the background image for the normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not being executed. is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). As a result, the display of the background image for the special period ends on the pattern display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is resumed. In the command handling process, when another command is received, the corresponding process is executed (step S2915).

Next, the table setting process in this embodiment executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. executed.

If the command for variation and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the results of the jackpot generation lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game cycle are identified, and the identification is performed. The information obtained is written in the sound and light side RAM 64 .

After that, if the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is the variation display time corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect (step S3203: YES), lottery processing for determining the type of ready-to-win effect. Executes selection processing of the lottery table to be used in . Specifically, when the preparation display flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for the preparation period is stored in the sound and light side ROM 63. to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S3205). If the special period flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3206: YES), the lottery table for the special period is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S3207). . If neither the preparation display flag nor the special period flag is set to "1" (step S3206: NO), the lottery table for normal period is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64. Then, the ready-to-win effect lottery process is executed by using the lottery table selected as the object to be used this time out of the lottery table for the preparation period, the lottery table for the special period and the lottery table for the normal period (step S3209). In the ready-to-win effect lottery processing, the value of the ready-to-win lottery counter at that point in time is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the lottery table selected as the object to be used this time. Then, the ready-to-win lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the ready-to-win lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current ready-to-win effect lottery process.

Here, a plurality of ready-to-win effects are set, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-win effect image on the pattern display device 41 is different for each ready-to-win effect. A difference in processing load occurs depending on the type of image data and the size of the image data used for displaying the ready-to-win effect image. The ready-to-win effect includes a high-load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-reach effect image is the largest, and a middle-load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 to display the ready-to-reach effect image is smaller than that of the high load effect. , and a low-load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-win effect image is smaller than that of the medium-load effect. In this case, the lottery table for the normal period includes all of the high load effect, the medium load effect and the low load effect as the types of the ready-to-win effect to be selected. On the other hand, the lottery table for the preparation period does not include the large load effect and the medium load effect, but includes the low load effect as the types of ready-to-win effects to be selected. In addition, the lottery table for the special period does not include the high-load presentation, but includes medium-load presentation and low-load presentation as the types of ready-to-win presentations to be selected.

During the special period, as already explained, the background image for the special period is displayed, so the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the pattern display device 41 is greater than during the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the ready-to-win effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a heavy load effect is displayed while a background image for the special period is being displayed during the special period. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

When starting the special period, it is necessary to initialize all the image data necessary for displaying the background image for the special period to the world coordinate system. The processing load of On the other hand, during the preparation period occurring before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the ready-to-win effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the game round production started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period occurs during the execution of the high load production and the medium load production. It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

As already explained, the execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game rounds. Thus, even if a large load performance or a medium load performance can be executed as a ready-to-win performance in the performance for game times started in the normal period, the ready-to-win performance ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, as already explained, the high load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the game round effect started in the preparation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load performance or medium load performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

In addition, the lottery table for the special period includes a reach effect in which a special correspondence image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in the game round that results in a big win, and the lottery table for the normal period and the lottery table for the preparation period include The ready-to-reach effect in which the special correspondence image is displayed is not included. As a result, it is possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the processing of step S3209 is executed, stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S3210). The contents of the stop symbol determination process are the same as step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

After that, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S3211). In the setting process of the control pattern table, whether or not the ready-to-win effect is generated, if the ready-to-win effect is generated, the result of the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S3209) and the result of the stop pattern determination process (step S3210) correspond to the combination. The control pattern table is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound and light side RAM 64 .

After that, determination processing of the variable display time is executed (step S3212). In this process, information on the variable display time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variable command received from the main side MPU 52 this time, and the information on the specified variable display time is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64. Set variable time counter. The fluctuating time counter is a counter for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify the timing of ending the fluctuating display of the symbols on the pattern display device 41 and starting the fixed display of the relevant symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started in the sound and light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

Thereafter, a variation pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). As a result, the display CPU 201 starts an effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41, and progresses the effect for the game round in accordance with the content of the effect determined by the sound and light side MPU 62. In this case, when it is determined that the ready-to-win effect will occur in the current game turn, the ready-to-win effect selected in step S3209 is executed by the symbol display device 41.例文帳に追加Note that in the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S3214 in addition to the above processes. Other processing contents are the same as step S415 of the table setting processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time-based production, the time-based production is started. As a result, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time has come. In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start the performance corresponding to the time on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

In this case, when the performance corresponding to the time is started, the preparation period occurs first, and when the preparation period elapses, the display contents of the image on the pattern display device 41 become flashier than the preparation period. period occurs. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special period is about to occur, and it is possible to gradually raise expectations for the occurrence of the special period. In the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in the remaining time notification image G63 in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

When it is time to start the time-based effect while the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image continue to display the effect for the game cycle so far, and the game is played. A remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image displayed as the effect for the round. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the performance corresponding to the time is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the performance for the game cycle.

In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is to be started in a situation where the character image for ready-to-win is displayed as an effect for the game round, the image is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Since the number of types of image data used for processing becomes extremely large, there is a risk that the processing load will become extremely large. On the other hand, when it is time to start the time-based effect while the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the effect for the game cycle is already determined by simply adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image is maintained according to the contents of the This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for the game round. As a result, even if it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the effect is displayed regardless of the variable display time of the effect for the game cycle and the start timing of the time-based effect. The performance for the game round during execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, when the special period starts, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period from the start timing. Become. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the simultaneous start of display of the background image for the special period on a plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the pattern display device 41 is greater than in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, the heavy load effect is not selected as the ready-to-win effect during the special period. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a heavy load effect is displayed while a background image for the special period is being displayed during the special period. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

When starting the special period, it is necessary to initialize all the image data necessary for displaying the background image for the special period to the world coordinate system. The processing load of On the other hand, during the preparation period occurring before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the ready-to-win effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the game round production started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period occurs during the execution of the high load production and the medium load production. It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game rounds. Thus, even if a large load performance or a medium load performance can be executed as a ready-to-win performance in the performance for game times started in the normal period, the ready-to-win performance ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the game round effect started in the preparation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load performance or medium load performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 in the time-related mode and the sound output in the time-related mode in the speaker unit 45 are determined depending on whether or not the performance for the game round is being executed when the timing for starting the time-related performance is reached. It will start regardless. As a result, when it is time to start the time-based effect while the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the background image for the preparatory period on the pattern display device 41 is displayed until the effect for the game cycle ends. Even if the contents of the background images in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not aligned due to the delay of the display, the contents of the light emitted from the display light emitting part 44 and the contents of the sound output from the speaker part 45 are the same as those of the plurality of pachinko machines. It is possible to start them at the machine 10 at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the performance corresponding to the time is simultaneously started in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

<Another form related to time-based production>
In the preparation period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is the display for the preparation period. A configuration may be used in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preparation period. Further, during the special period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is changed to that for the special period. A display mode may be used, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special period.

・When the execution period guaranteed as the special period has passed while the demo display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the timing when the execution period passed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the special period ends immediately and the normal performance is resumed. In this case, it is possible to restore the image data group for normal effect to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 using the predetermined time, and set the image data group for normal effect with respect to the world coordinate system. It is possible to perform initial settings for

・If the execution period guaranteed as a special period has passed while the effect for the game cycle is being executed, even if the effect for the open/close execution mode is executed following the effect for the game cycle Alternatively, the special period may end when the effect for the game cycle ends. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long period of time.

The configuration is not limited to the one that uses the RTC 65 to specify the start timing of the time-based effect. The elapsed time may be measured, and when the measured elapsed time becomes the time corresponding to the generation cycle of the time-based presentation, the sound and light side MPU 62 may specify that it is time to start the time-based presentation. .

Not all texture data is read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supply of operating power to the display CPU 201, but texture data to be used when the need arises is It may be configured to be read each time. In this case, in step S2902 in the command handling process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period are read, in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period are read, and in step S2912 All of the image data group for displaying the background image for normal effect is read out.

・During the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the division display area G66 set in a part of the symbol display device 41, and the areas other than the division display area G66 are displayed. , the background image for the preparation period may be displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to emphasize and display that it is a preparation period.

- During the preparation period, a new start of the game-playing effect may be restricted, and the restricted state may be canceled when the special period starts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special period from starting while the performance for the game cycle is being executed.

・When it is time to start the time-based effect, if neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open/close execution mode is executed, the special period will start without going through the preparation period, and the time will be supported. When it is time to start the production, if the production for the game round or the production for the open/close execution mode is being executed, the period during which these productions are being executed becomes a preparation period, and the production that was in the middle of the execution is performed. The special period may be configured to start when the special period ends.

At least one of the light emission control period corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control period corresponding to the time in the speaker unit 45 is set after a predetermined second has passed from the start timing of the effect corresponding to the time in the pattern display device 41. It is good also as a structure which is started. In this case, it is preferable that the control period to be started after the elapse of the predetermined seconds is started before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41 .

<Further alternative form regarding time-based production>
・In this different form, when the timing for starting the time-based effect is reached while the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the game cycle or the opening/closing execution mode that is in the process of execution The image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not displayed at all until the effect for the preparation period ends. A processing configuration for producing the effect will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing setting processing for starting the preparation period in this another embodiment.

First, the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). After that, a command for instructing readout of the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, the display CPU 201 causes the data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period has been transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started.

After executing the processing of step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current state is the delay target state (step S3303). A situation in which the effect for the game cycle is being executed or a situation in which the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If the status is to be delayed (step S3303: YES), the flag during delay provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3304).

If the current status is not the delay target status (step S3303: NO), the preparation display flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3305). After that, the continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the display for preparation is calculated (step S3306). Since the preparatory period starts at the start timing of the time-based production this time, the duration of the display for preparation is the time from the start timing of the time-based production to the start timing of the special period. Then, information corresponding to the preparatory display continuation period calculated in step S3306 is set in the preparatory display start command read from the sound and light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparatory display start command is sent to the display CPU 201. It transmits (step S3308).

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing command handling processing in this alternative embodiment. When the display start command for preparation is received (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 grasps the remaining period of the preparation period from the display start command for preparation (step S3402). Then, in the case where the count value is subtracted and displayed in the remaining time notification image G63 from a fixed start value (for example, "60") to a fixed end value (for example, "0") within the range of the remaining period of the preparation period The update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and the update cycle of the count value and the subtraction value (specifically "1") of the count value in one update cycle are kept constant. A count value update cycle required to keep the count value at a fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). As a result, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated according to the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In addition, in the command correspondence processing, processing other than the above processing is also executed.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the setting process during the preparation period in this another form.

It is neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (steps S3501 and S3502: NO), and if the delay flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), the delay It is determined whether or not it is time to cancel (step S3504). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed, the effect for the game cycle ends and a new effect for the game cycle is started. is started or the demonstration display is started, it is determined that it is time to cancel the delay. In addition, if a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game is started. It is determined that it is time to release the delay when the performance for the round is started or when the demonstration display is started.

If it is time to cancel the delay (step S3504: YES), the delay flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and the preparation display flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3506). After that, the continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the display for preparation is calculated (step S3507). This time, since the preparatory period starts at a timing later than the start timing of the time-based effect, the remaining period until the start timing of the special period is the continuation period of the display for preparation. Then, information corresponding to the preparatory display continuation period calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparatory display start command read from the sound and light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparatory display start command is sent to the display CPU 201. It transmits (step S3509). As a result, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 already described in the command handling processing (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 is executed, so that the count in the remaining time notification image G63 is executed in the remaining period of the preparation period as already described. Values are decremented from a fixed start value to a fixed end value.

The processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81) in the above embodiment.

As described above, in the situation where the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, when it is time to start the time-based effect, the effect for the game cycle during execution or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode The display of images for the preparation period, including the remaining time notification image G63, does not start until the effect of is completed. As a result, for example, in a situation where expectations for a big win result are heightened due to the execution of a predetermined ready-to-win effect, the display of the image for the preparation period suddenly starts, and the predetermined ready-to-win effect is displayed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the phenomenon that the player's attention is lowered.

In addition, in the configuration in which the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode that is being executed ends. When the presentation for the game round or the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode ends and the display of the image for the preparation period is started, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is changed in relation to the remaining duration of the preparation period. An update period is set. As a result, even when the display of the image for the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time-based effect, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is changed from the fixed start value to the fixed value. It is possible to continue until the end value is reached.

<Configuration for performing separate storage effects>
Next, the configuration for performing the separate save effect will be described.

The separately saved effect is to save the drawing data created by projecting the 3D image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto the virtual 2D plane as separately saved data, and then save the separately saved data is set in the plate-like object data to create drawing data by placing it in the world coordinate system and projecting the separately saved data together with other image data placed in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. It is an effect that displays an image by doing so. In addition, during the period when the image is displayed using the drawing data created based on the placement of the separately saved data in the world coordinate system, when creating the separately saved data, the projection target to the virtual two-dimensional plane Mask control is performed to exclude the three-dimensional image data that has become from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Image data excluded from being projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane in mask control may be configured so as not to be arranged in the world coordinate system, and the arrangement position, shape, etc., of those arranged in the world coordinate system will not be updated. A configuration may be adopted in which the image is not projected and is further excluded from the projection target. By creating drawing data using separately stored data and executing mask control in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 even when the types of images to be displayed increase. becomes.

88A and 88B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the specific contents of the separate storage effect, and FIGS. 88A1 and 88B1 show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. 88(a2) and 88(b2) show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

In a situation where the separate save effect is not being executed, as shown in FIG. 88(a1), when the viewpoint PC11 is used as a reference, the image data 241 on the backmost side is arranged at the farthest position, and the second image data 241 is arranged in front of it. Image data 242 for the first background individual image and image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged, and image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the near side. The backmost image data 241 is image data obtained by pasting texture data for the backmost surface onto plate-like object data (that is, plate polygons). The plate-shaped object data is object data without thickness, and has a smaller data capacity and a smaller processing load during geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205 than three-dimensional object data with thickness.

In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1), projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed to create drawing data, resulting in the drawing data shown in FIG. 88(a2). It is possible to cause the pattern display device 41 to display such an image for one frame. In the one-frame image, a first background individual image G72 and a second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and an effect character image G74 is further displayed in front of them. Then, between the update timings of the plurality of images, the arrangement positions and shapes of the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system are displayed. By changing , it is possible to change the display positions, shapes, etc. of the first individual background image G72, the second individual background image G73, and the effect character image G74 in the image for one frame.

In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 243 is the object of projection, while the image data 244 for the effect character is not the object of projection. It is possible to create two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of the still image of the second individual background image G73 as the first separate saved data. By pasting the first separately stored data onto the planar polygon data, the first separately stored image data 245 is arranged in the world coordinate system, and the image data 244 for the effect character and the image for the additional individual image are placed in front of the first separately stored image data 245. By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88(b1) is obtained. In this state, the first separate stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. As a result, it is possible to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image of one frame as shown in FIG. 88(b2). In the one-frame image, a first background individual image G72 and a second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and an effect character image G74 and an additional individual image G75 are displayed in front of them. Is displayed.

However, since the image data for displaying the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 is arranged in the world coordinate system as a still image using the first separate saved image data 245, a plurality of images can be displayed. It is not possible to individually change the arrangement position, shape, etc. of the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 between update timings. On the other hand, the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. It is possible to individually change the arrangement position, shape, etc. of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the update timings of the images.

In the case where drawing data is created using the first separately saved image data 245 as described above, the first separately saved image data 245 is the most background image when creating the first separately saved data in the world coordinate system. image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image are arranged in front of the positions where they were arranged. Then, the space MS1 on the far side of the first separate saved image data 245 is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the first separate stored image data 245, a virtual two-dimensional image is generated to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. The number of image data to be projected onto the plane is reduced, and the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

By executing mask control, the image data 241 on the backmost side, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image are excluded from the objects to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in this situation, the work RAM 202 stores and holds parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information for these image data 241 to 243 . As a result, an area for updating the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 is secured in the work RAM 202 when returning to the period in which the image is displayed by projecting the image data 241 to 243 onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. There is no need to perform processing to In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, initial processing such as search processing of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing are performed. Setting processing needs to be executed, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 to be masked is stored in the work RAM 202, and the processing load on the display CPU 201 becomes extremely large when the masking control is canceled. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

In addition, the display CPU 201 performs mask control, so that the image data for the first individual background image is displayed even in a situation where the image data 241 to 243 are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. 242 and the update processing of the parameter information for the image data 243 for the second individual background image. As a result, immediately after the period during which the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed ends, the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 are displayed from the state immediately before the start of the period. Instead of restarting the movement, the first background individual image is changed from the state in which the change in movement continues for the duration of the period in accordance with the display pattern up to that point with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period. It is possible to restart the movement of G72 and the second background individual image G73.

In addition, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are excluded from the objects to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control. Even in this situation, the VRAM 204 retains a buffer area in which information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 on the world coordinate system is stored. As a result, when returning to the period in which images are displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 on the world coordinate system is obtained. There is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area for storage in the VRAM 204 . In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute initialization processing such as search processing of the storage area of the VRAM 204 and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing, but this is subject to mask control. By retaining the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 in the VRAM 204 as they are, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is cancelled.

Here, if it becomes necessary to create separate storage data using image data excluded from the projection target by the mask control in a situation where mask control is being executed, the image data is excluded from the projection target. Therefore, separate storage data cannot be created using the image data. A case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c). FIGS. 89(a1) to 89(c1) show how three-dimensional image data are arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89(a2) to 89(c2) show projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. Indicates the content of the image displayed using the drawing data created in .

As shown in FIG. 89(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 242 for the second background individual image are arranged in front of it. , and the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the front side. It is possible to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image of one frame as shown in (a2). In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89(a1) is saved as the second separate saved data.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(b1), by pasting the second separately saved data onto the planar polygon data, the second separately saved image data 247 is arranged in the world coordinate system, and the second separately saved image data 247 is arranged in the world coordinate system. Effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. FIG. Then, the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, resulting in one frame as shown in FIG. 89(b2). image can be displayed on the symbol display device 41 . Note that the effect image data 248 is data obtained by pasting texture data for effect images onto plate-like polygon data, and the effect image data 248 is set with an α value indicating transparency or semi-transparency as a whole, making it opaque. is not set, the second separate image data 247 is overwritten with the effect image data 248 after being subjected to transparency processing or semi-transparency processing.

In the case where drawing data is created using the second separately saved image data 247 as described above, the second separately saved image data 247 is the most background image when creating the second separately saved data in the world coordinate system. image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are arranged in front of the positions where they were arranged. Then, the space MS2 on the far side of the second separate saved image data 247 is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. Therefore, the number of image data to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

However, immediately after the display of the image using the second separately stored image data 247, the first separately stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image are displayed as shown in FIG. 88(b1). When it becomes necessary to display an image using the image data 246 for the background, the image data 241 on the backmost side, the first background Since mask control is performed on the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(c1), the first separately stored image data 245 cannot be arranged behind the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system. 88(c2), the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed while the background image is not displayed. Further, for example, not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, but also the image data 241 for the backmost, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 242 for the second individual background image are displayed in the world coordinate system. If an attempt is made to create drawing data by arranging the image data 243 for the image data 243 and projecting all the image data 241 to 244 and 246 onto the virtual two-dimensional plane, the processing load of the VDP 205 will increase. As a case where such a situation occurs, in this pachinko machine 10, when the operation device 48 for effect is operated, an operation corresponding effect is generated in which an image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247. In such a configuration, it may be necessary to display an image using the first separately stored image data 245 immediately after the end of the operation-responsive effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display an image using the first stored image data 245 immediately after displaying an image using the second stored image data 247. It is configured. Hereinafter, how the separate save effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 90A and 90B are time charts showing how the separate save effect is performed. FIG. 90A shows a normal drawing period during which mask control is not executed, and FIG. 90B shows a mask control period during which mask control is executed. FIG. 90(c) shows the timing at which at least one of the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data is separately stored, and FIG. FIG. 90(e) shows the period during which the second separate storage data is stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204, FIG. 90(f) shows the operation effective period of the operation device 48 for production, FIG. 90(g) shows the operation timing of the operation device 48 for production, and FIG. 90(h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding production.

First, the case where an image is displayed using the first separate stored image data 245 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), during the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, the timing of t1 becomes the saving execution timing of the first separate saved data as shown in FIG. 90(c). In this case, the first separate save data is created as shown in FIGS. As a result, the first separate save image data 245 is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251 at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 90(d).

After that, at timing t2, it becomes a period in which an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is displayed, so that it becomes a period in which mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). . In this case, even during the period when the mask control is performed, it corresponds to each of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate stored image data 245. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 to be displayed is stored in the work RAM 202, and update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. FIG.

After that, at timing t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. Return to the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 displays various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. , the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed from the timing when the mask control was started.

Next, a case where an image using the first stored image data 245 is displayed immediately after an image using the second stored image data 247 is displayed will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) will be referred to as needed. 91(a) to 91(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how an image is displayed using the first separately stored image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247. FIG. 91(a1) to 91(c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91(a2) to 91(c2) show projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The content of the image displayed using the drawing data created by doing is shown.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90(a), timing t4 becomes the start timing of the operation effective period of the operating device 48 for effect as shown in FIG. 90(f). In this case, separate storage is executed at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 90(c). At the execution timing of this separate storage, both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are subject to separate storage.

The manner in which both the first stored data by type and the second stored data by type are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91(a). As shown in FIG. 91(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 242 for the second background individual image are arranged in front of it. The image data 243 for the effect character is arranged, and the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the front side. It is possible to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image of one frame as shown in (a2). In this case, the drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91(a1) onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is saved in the second separate save buffer 252 as the second separate save data. be. The second separate stored data is data that enables the display of still images of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

91(a1), in a state in which the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged, the image data 241 on the backmost side, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 242 for the second background individual image are displayed. Projection processing onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed such that the image data 243 is set as a projection target while the image data 244 for the effect character is not set as a projection target. Two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of still images of the image G72 and the second individual background image G73 is created as the first separate saved data. Then, the first separate save data is saved in the first separate save buffer 251 .

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 90, at the timing of t4, the first separate saved data and the second separate saved data are created, so that the first separate save buffer 251 stores the first separate saved data as shown in FIG. The separately saved data is stored and held, and the second separately saved data is stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252 as shown in FIG. 90(e).

After that, at the timing of t5, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 90(g), thereby starting the operation corresponding effect as shown in FIG. 90(h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(b1), the second separately stored data is pasted on the planar polygon data and arranged in the world coordinate system as the second separately stored image data 247. Effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. FIG. Then, by projecting the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, one frame as shown in FIG. image can be displayed on the symbol display device 41 .

By starting the operation corresponding effect at the timing t5, it becomes a period during which the mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) at the timing t5. In this case, even during the period when the mask control is performed, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image to be displayed in the second separate saved image data 247 are displayed. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to G74 are stored in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues updating the various parameter information.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 90(h), the operation corresponding effect ends. In this case, the display of the image using the first another saved image data 245 is started at the timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(c1), the first separately stored data is pasted on the planar polygon data and arranged as the first separately stored image data 245 in the world coordinate system, and the effect character display is placed in front of it. and image data 246 for additional individual images are arranged. In this state, the first separate stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. As a result, it is possible to display an image of one frame on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(c2). In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 of the parameter information for the effect character image data 244 continues to update, so mask control is started for the display of the effect character image G74. The display mode is started from the timing corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has passed with respect to the timing.

By starting to display an image using the first separate stored image data 245 at timing t6, the mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the objects to be masked are the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first individual background image G72, and the second individual background image G73, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image. Image data 244 and 246 corresponding to image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the images G71 to G73 to be masked are stored in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues updating the parameter information. be.

After that, at timing t7, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. Return to the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 displays various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. , the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has passed from the timing when the mask control was started. As a result, it is possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the pattern display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 .

Next, although both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are stored separately, the first separately stored image data 245 is used without displaying the image using the second separately stored image data 247. A case in which an image is displayed will be described.

During the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90(a), the effective period of operation of the operating device 48 for effect as shown in FIG. 90(f) becomes the start timing at the timing of t8. In this case, as in the case of the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 90(c), it is the execution timing of the separate storage of both the first data stored separately and the second stored data separately. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90(d), the first separate save data is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251, and as shown in FIG. 90(e), the second separate save buffer 252 2 The stored data is stored and held.

However, as shown in FIGS. 90(f) and 90(g), at the timing of t9, the effective operation period elapses without the operation device 48 being operated. In this case, no image is displayed using the second another stored image data 247, so mask control is not executed from timing t8 to timing t9. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the first separate saved data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate data created at timing t8 and stored in the first separate save buffer 251 is erased, and the first separate save data created at timing t9 is stored in the first separate save buffer 251. Newly stored. As a result, it is possible to display the images G71 to G73 in a display mode with a timing closer to the timing of using the first stored image data 245 as an image using the first stored image data 245. Become. Note that the timing at which the first separate data is newly created is the timing for updating the image next to the timing for updating the image for which the valid operation period has passed.

Thereafter, at timing t10, the display of an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is started, thereby starting mask control as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the objects to be masked are the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first individual background image G72, and the second individual background image G73, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image. Image data 244 and 246 corresponding to image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the images G71 to G73 to be masked are stored in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues updating the parameter information. be.

After that, at the timing of t11, the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. Return to the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 displays various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. , the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed from the timing when the mask control was started. As a result, it is possible to match the contents of the effect with the effect execution device other than the pattern display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 .

A specific processing configuration for executing the separate save effect will be described below. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for the separate save effect executed by the display CPU 201. FIG. Incidentally, the arithmetic processing for the separate save effect is executed in the background arithmetic processing of step S2503 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the game turn in which the separate save effect is to be executed.

First, by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the effect for the current game round, the content of the data to be referred to in the execution target table is updated this time. (step S3601). After that, if neither the operation corresponding effect is being executed nor the operation valid period (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the usage period of the first separate stored data (step S3604). The usage period of the first separately stored data is generated when the elapsed time of the game cycle reaches a predetermined time if the game cycle does not generate the operation effective period and the separately stored effect is generated. If it is a game cycle in which an operation effective period occurs, it occurs when the operation effective period elapses without the operation corresponding effect being executed or when the operation corresponding effect ends.

If it is not the usage period of the first individual stored data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes backmost image data 241 , first background individual image image data 242 , second background individual image image data 243 , and effect character image data 244 . After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3606 and S3607). After that, the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is time to create the first separate data (step S3609: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separate data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3605. is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Also, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the drawing list, and the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set when this time is the creation timing of the first separately stored data.

If it is during the usage period of the first separately stored data in the arithmetic processing for the separately stored effect (step S3604: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is updated based on the currently set execution target table. grasp (steps S3611 to S3613). The image data includes the first separate save data stored in the first separate save buffer 251, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. After that, image data 244 for the production character, image data 241 for the backmost image, image data 242 for the first individual background image, image data 243 for the second individual background image, image data 246 for the additional individual image, and image data 246 for the first individual image. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the separately stored data, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244, 246 (steps S3614 to S3617). . In this case, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. The storage of the parameter information for H.246 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. After that, the usage instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains various image data ascertained in steps S3611 to S3613. 241 to 244 and 246 are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set in the drawing list. In addition, use instruction information of separately saved data is set in the drawing list.

In the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect, if it is the operation effective period (step S3603: YES), the operation effective period processing is executed in step S3618, and if the operation corresponding effect is in progress (step S3602: YES), and in step S3619, an operation-response rendering process is executed. The operation valid period processing and the operation corresponding rendering processing will be described below.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing processing during the valid period of operation.

If it is time to start the effective period of operation (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when the operation effective period is not started and the effect operation device 48 is not operated (steps S3701 and S3703: NO), the currently set execution target table is used. , the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3704). The image data includes backmost image data 241 , first background individual image image data 242 , second background individual image image data 243 , and effect character image data 244 . After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3705 and S3706). After that, the effective period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). If it is the end timing of the effective period of operation (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

When the operation effective period processing is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704. It is set as a placement target in the coordinate system. Also, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, valid period information is set in the drawing list, and if this time is the start timing of the operation valid period, the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data is set, and if this time is the end timing of the operation valid period. For example, the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data is set.

If the effect operation device 48 is operated in the operation effective period processing (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes the second separate save data stored in the second separate save buffer 252 and the effect image data 248 . After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate storage data are generated. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each of them, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244, 248 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the image data 244 for the production character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. , the storage of the parameter information about these image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains various image data ascertained in steps S3710 and S3711. 248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to the image data 248 is also set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing processing during operation-response rendering.

First, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (steps S3801 and S3802). The image data includes the second separate save data stored in the second separate save buffer 252 and the effect image data 248 . After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate storage data are generated. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each of them, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244, 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3803 to S3806). In this case, the image data 244 for the production character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. , the storage of the parameter information about these image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains various image data grasped in steps S3801 and S3802. 248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to the image data 248 is also set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

Next, setting processing for separate storage display performed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for separate storage display is executed as part of the background setting process executed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). Further, when the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data, the use instruction information of the separately stored data, the validity period information, or the operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the separately stored display is executed.

If the usage instruction information for separately saved data is not set in the current drawing list, and if the operation corresponding effect information is not set in the current drawing list (step S3901: NO), the maximum The back image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are grasped as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system (step S3902). . Also, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in a state in which the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(a2).

If the usage instruction information for separately saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), the first separately saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image data are displayed based on the current drawing list. image data 246 is grasped as an object to be placed in the world coordinate system (steps S3906 to S3908). Also, the parameter information to be applied to the first individual stored data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, in a state in which the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, the setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(c2).

If the operation corresponding effect information is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: NO), based on the current drawing list, the second separate data and effect image data 248 are grasped as objects to be placed in the world coordinate system. (Steps S3910 and S3911). Also, the parameter information to be applied to the second separate data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in a state in which the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the second separate data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(b2).

Next, drawing data creation processing for separate storage display performed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for separate storage display is executed as part of the drawing data creation process for effect and background executed in step S2610 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, when non-use instruction information for separately saved data, use instruction information for separately saved data, effective period information, or operation response effect information is set in the drawing list, drawing data creation processing for separately saved display is executed. be.

If the current drawing list contains the first creation instruction information of the separately saved data or the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data (step S4001: YES), the backmost image data 241 and the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second individual background image onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create the first separate storage data (step S4002). Then, the created first separate save data is written in the first separate save buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate save data is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251 .

If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or if the process of step S4002 is executed, rendering data for displaying one of the images in FIGS. 91(a2), 91(b2), and 91(c2) is created. (step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data synthesizing process in step S2612 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) to display an image of one frame.

After that, if the second creation instruction information of the separate saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the previous step S4004 is set as the second separate saved data in the VRAM 204 as the second separate data. Write to the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second separate save data is stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252 . Moreover, since the drawing data used for displaying the image for one frame is used as the second separately stored data, the processing load for creating the second separately stored data can be suppressed.

As described above, when displaying an image using the first separate stored data, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are On the other hand, it is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while performing mask control. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 is reduced, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, , it is possible to suppress the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing. When displaying images using the second separate data, the image data 241 for the backmost, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, and the effect character are displayed. It is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing mask control on the image data 244 for the background. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if this is done, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

Parameter information of image data excluded from projection onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of mask control is stored and held without being erased from the work RAM 202 . As a result, when returning to a period in which an image is displayed by projecting the image data onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, processing is executed to secure an area in the work RAM 202 for updating the parameter information of the image data. does not need to be done. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, initial processing such as search processing of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing are performed. Setting processing needs to be executed, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control is stored in the work RAM 202, and the processing load on the display CPU 201 becomes extremely large when the mask control is cancelled. It is possible to prevent this.

Further, even in a situation where predetermined image data is excluded from projection targets onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of mask control, the display CPU 201 performs update processing of parameter information for the predetermined image data. continue. As a result, immediately after the period during which an image is displayed using the first separately stored data or the second separately stored data, the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data from the state immediately before the start of the period ends. is not restarted, but the display state immediately before the start of the period is changed to the predetermined image data from the state in which the change in movement continues for the duration of the period according to the display pattern up to that point. It is possible to resume the movement of the corresponding image. As a result, it is possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the pattern display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 .

In addition, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are excluded from the objects to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control. Even in this situation, the VRAM 204 retains a buffer area in which information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 on the world coordinate system is stored. As a result, when returning to the period in which images are displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 on the world coordinate system is obtained. There is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area for storage in the VRAM 204 . In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute initialization processing such as search processing of the storage area of the VRAM 204 and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing, but this is subject to mask control. By retaining the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 in the VRAM 204 as they are, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is cancelled.

If a period for displaying images using the first separately stored data may occur immediately after the period for displaying images using the second separately stored data ends, the image using the second separately stored data is displayed. Before the period to start, not only the second saved data but also the first saved data are created. As a result, even in a configuration in which mask control is performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first stored data during the period in which an image using the second stored data is displayed, Immediately after the period for displaying the image using the saved data ends, the image using the first separate saved data can be displayed.

Also, even if the first separately stored data is created before the start of the period for displaying the image using the second separately stored data, the period for displaying the image using the second separately stored data is If the mask control is not executed for the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separately stored data because it does not occur, immediately before starting the display of the image using the first separately stored data, the second 1 Separately stored data is newly created. As a result, it is possible to display the images G71 to G73 in the display mode at timings closer to the timing of using the first separately stored data as images using the first separately stored data.

<Another form regarding another storage effect>
- Instead of storing and holding both the first separately saved data and the second separately saved data when the operation valid period starts, the first separately saved data is stored at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period starts. and the second separately stored data, one of the separately stored data is stored and held, and the other separately stored data is stored at a timing after the predetermined timing and before the start of the valid operation period or at the start timing of the valid operation period. It may be configured to be held. In this case, it is possible to distribute the processing load compared to a configuration in which both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are stored and held in the same processing cycle.

・When mask control is being executed, the image data to be masked is not arranged in the world coordinate system. may be excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, when the mask control ends, there is no need to execute processing for rearranging the image data subject to the mask control in the world coordinate system. Further, in this configuration, the image data subject to mask control may be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information applied to the image data in the VDP 205 may not be changed. However, it is preferable that the update of the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 is continued.

In place of the configuration in which the display CPU 201 continues to update the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control, the display CPU 201 updates the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control. It may be configured so that it is not performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data subject to mask control is resumed from the display state of the image corresponding to the separately saved data. Even with this configuration, it is preferable that the work RAM 202 stores and holds the state in which the parameter information to be subjected to the mask control is stored during execution of the mask control.

- Separately stored data separately stored in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Also, the above mask control configuration may be applied to a configuration in which there is only one type of separately stored data.

<Configuration for effecting angle display>
Next, a configuration for performing an angle display effect will be described.

The angle display effect utilizes a plurality of types of moving images that enable display objects whose movements change with the passage of time to be viewed from different angles. It is a production that changes the target of use to a video with a different angle from the target video. Specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b). As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), in the angle display rendering, a live image is displayed as a moving image. In this photographed image, a person is displayed as the photographed character image G81, and the movement of the photographed character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. Also, FIG. 97(a) corresponds to a moving image of a person captured in the actual character image G81 from an A angle that is a predetermined angle with respect to the actual character image G81, and FIG. 97(b) is different from the A angle. It corresponds to a moving image of a person in the actual character image G81 taken from an angle. In addition to the A-angle video and the B-angle video, there is also a video image of a person in the actual character image G81 from a C-angle different from the A-angle and B-angle.

The contents of the data pre-stored in the memory module 203 for executing the angle display rendering will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

The memory module 203 stores a first moving image data group 261 of A angle, a second moving image data group 262 of A angle, and A A third video data group 263 of angles is stored in advance. The memory module 203 also stores a first B-angle video data group 264, a B-angle second video data group 265, and a B-angle third video data group 266 as video data for displaying the B-angle video. is stored in advance. The memory module 203 also stores a C-angle first moving image data group 267, a C-angle second moving image data group 268, and a C-angle third moving image data group 269 as moving image data for displaying a C-angle moving image. is stored in advance.

99A and 99B are explanatory diagrams for explaining each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269. FIG. 99(a) shows the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, and FIG. 99(b) shows the second moving image of the A angle. 99(c) shows the third moving image data group 263 of A angle, FIG. 99(d) shows the first moving image data group 264 of B angle, and FIG. 99(e) shows the B angle 99(f) shows the third moving image data group 266 of B angle, FIG. 99(g) shows the first moving image data group 267 of C angle, and FIG. ) shows the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and FIG. 99(i) shows the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) to 99(i), each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of pieces of moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image data 271a to 273c are, as already explained, image data that are interframe-compressed so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data, and are encoded, for example, by the MPEG2 method. . When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, they are developed into still image data for a plurality of frames.

Each piece of moving image data 271a to 273c possessed by each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a data amount so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. is set. Specifically, for the still image data for the minimum number of units, each of the moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (update 48 frames). It has become. Each moving image data group 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20 pieces) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

The first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle all correspond to the movement of the live-action character image G81 according to a predetermined motion pattern to the A angle. It is intended to display a series of animations as viewed from different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of pieces of moving image data 271a to 271c in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle, the still image data of the last order in the moving image data 271a to 271c whose order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the following for the predetermined order: The moving image data 271a to 271c in order has continuity in the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined movement pattern with the still image data in the first order. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271a included in the first moving image data group 261 of A angle according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the second moving image data group 262 of A angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of A angle according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the third moving image data group 263 of A angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of A angle according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle.

The first moving image data group 264 of angle B, the second moving image data group 265 of angle B, and the third moving image data group 266 of angle B all correspond to the movement of the actual character image G81 according to a predetermined movement pattern to the angle B. It is intended to display a series of animations as viewed from different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle, the still image data of the last order in the moving image data 272a to 272c whose order to be decoded is a predetermined order, and the following with respect to the predetermined order: The moving image data 272a to 272c in order has continuity in the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined movement pattern with the still image data in the first order. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 264 of B angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272a included in the first moving image data group 264 of B angle according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the B-angle second video data group 265, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the video data 272b included in the B-angle second video data group 265 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the third moving image data group 266 of B angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272c included in the third moving image data group 266 of B angle according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle.

The C-angle first moving image data group 267, the C-angle second moving image data group 268, and the C-angle third moving image data group 269 all correspond to the movement of the actual character image G81 according to a predetermined motion pattern to the C angle. It is intended to display a series of animations as viewed from different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle. In this case, in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle, the still image data of the last order in the moving image data 273a to 273c whose order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the following with respect to the predetermined order: The moving image data 273a to 273c in order has continuity in the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined movement pattern with the still image data in the first order. Therefore, in the case of the C-angle first moving image data group 267, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273a included in the C-angle first moving image data group 267 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle second moving image data group 268, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273b included in the C-angle second moving image data group 268 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle third moving image data group 269, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273c included in the C-angle third moving image data group 269 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle.

The moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded to derive still image data. When the image display is started from the timing in the middle of the data 271a to 273c, a processing waiting time occurs until the still image data at the timing in the middle is derived. In this case, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order. can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among A-angle, B-angle and C-angle during execution of the angle display effect.

Here, in the angle display effect, the angle change opportunity is generated by the operation of the effect operation device 48 . In this case, if the angle change does not occur early with respect to the operation timing of the operating device 48 for presentation, it is difficult to give the player the impression that the angle has been changed triggered by the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation. put away. On the other hand, as already explained, each of the angles A to C has a plurality, specifically three, of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image. Furthermore, the number of image updates (number of frames) after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the first-order still image data in the arbitrary moving image data 271a to 273c is between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. are different.

Specifically, in each angle A to C, the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 are the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the first order. The moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the subsequent order are still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the previous order. It corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number of minutes corresponding to the minimum number of units. In this case, the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, the first moving image data group 264 of B angle, and the first moving image data group 267 of C angle have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a. , the number of image updates after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the order corresponding to each other is the same.

In the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 at each angle A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in each order is the first moving image data at each angle A to C. In the data groups 261, 264, and 267, for the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the corresponding order, corresponding to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 there is In other words, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 in each angle A to C are the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the first order. , corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1, and the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the subsequent order correspond to the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the previous order. , corresponds to the timing at which the moving image display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are the moving images included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order among the data 271a, 272a, 273a and the contents of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap. In other words, all the still image data created by the pieces of moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 is included in the still image data created by the two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a included in the .

In the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 at each angle A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in each order is the second moving image data at each angle A to C. In the data groups 262, 265, and 268, for the still image data of the first order in the corresponding order of the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b, corresponding to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the second reference period K1 there is In other words, the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 in each angle A to C are the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in the first order. , corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for a second reference period K2 corresponding to twice the first reference period K1. 271c, 272c, and 273c, corresponding to the timing at which the moving image display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c included in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 correspond to the moving image data included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 at the same angle. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order of the data 271a, 272a, 273a and the contents of the still image data created by the decoding process partly overlap, and the second moving image data at the same angle. Contents of moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b included in groups 262, 265, and 268 in corresponding order and still image data created by decoding partially overlap. is doing. Furthermore, all the still image data created by the pieces of moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 are the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 Two continuous moving images included in the still image data created by the two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a contained in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 It is included in the still image data created by the image data 271b, 272b, and 273b.

The number of still image data reproducible in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data reproducible by one moving image data 271a-273c included in each of the moving image data 271a-273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of pieces of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16 times.

The number of still image data reproducible in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data reproducible by one moving image data 271a-273c included in each of the moving image data 271a-273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of pieces of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32 times.

As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 are provided for displaying the same moving image at each angle A to C, respectively. In each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 have a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c for the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267. , and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 are still images that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c for the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268. It is shifted by a first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of data units. As a result, it is possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in the predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in each angle. It is possible to cause an angle change at an early stage.

Next, how the angle display effect progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 100(a) shows the operation timing of the production operation device 48, FIG. 100(b) shows the waiting period until the angle is switched with respect to the operation of the production operation device 48, and FIG. Fig. 100(d) shows the period during which the moving image of angle A is displayed, and Fig. 100(e) shows one data included in moving image data groups 261 to 263 of angle A. 100(f) shows the period during which the moving image data 271a to 271c are read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, FIG. indicates a period during which one moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266 is read from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. FIG. In the following description, the case where the A angle is changed to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns of angle change.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), in a situation where a moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 out of the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, as shown in FIG. 100(c) At timing t1, the timing at which switching to the second moving image data group 265 of B angle is possible occurs, and at timing t2, the timing at which switching to the third moving image data group 266 of B angle is possible occurs. However, since the effect operation device 48 is not operated by the timing t1 and the timing t2, the angle is not switched.

The switching of the angle triggered by the operation of the production operation device 48 is performed by looping in a predetermined order among the A angle, B angle and C angle. Specifically, at the start timing of the angle display effect, the A angle is selected, and after that, with the operation of the effect operation device 48 as a trigger, the angle A→B angle→C angle→A angle→B angle→C angle→A Angle switching occurs in the order of angle → .

After that, at timing t3, it is time to read and decode the moving image data 271a in the next order in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle which is the object of moving image display. Therefore, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. A decoding process is started for the image data 271a. In this case, only one moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the decoding process is started. A plurality of pieces of still image data after the decoding process are written to the moving image data area 211b. When reading out and decoding the one moving image data 271a, the moving image data area 211b is set so as not to erase the still image data created from the current one moving image data 271a to be displayed. data is set to

After that, at the timing t4, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the timing for switching to the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle occurs as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, since the effect operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing t4, angle switching does not occur, and the moving image of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle whose decoding is completed at the timing t4. Display of the moving image using the data 271a is started.

After that, at the timing of t5, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 100(a). In this case, the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed, and it is not the time to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle. switching is in a standby state.

After that, at timing t6, with respect to timing t7, which is the timing at which switching to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of B angle is possible, a period corresponding to the period enabling decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is obtained. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Accordingly, at the timing t6, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272b in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle is started as shown in FIG. 100(g). Specifically, in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the moving image data 272b of the switching destination this time is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and decoding processing is performed on the moving image data 272b. be started. A plurality of pieces of still image data after the decoding process are written to the moving image data area 211b. When reading out and decoding the one moving image data 272b, the moving image data area 211b is set so as not to erase the still image data created from the current one moving image data 271a to be displayed. data is set to It should be noted that the period between the decoding start possible timing and the switching possible timing is a period shorter than the period during which moving image display is performed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. It corresponds to the update timing of the image two times before the possible timing.

Thereafter, at timing t7 when the decoding process is completed, display of a moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, which has been decoded at the timing t7, is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100(f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(c), at timing t8, there occurs a timing at which switching to the third moving image data group 269 of C angle is possible. However, since the effect operation device 48 has not been operated by the time t8, angle switching does not occur. The moving image display using the moving image data 272b is continued.

As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation. Even if it is started, if the decoding process is not completed by the next angle switchable timing, angle switching is not performed at the next angle switchable timing, and the next angle switchable timing is performed. The angle is switched at . Such operation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), in a situation where a moving image is being displayed using the first moving image data group 261 out of the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, at the timing of t9, FIG. As shown, the production operating device 48 is operated. In this case, the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed, and it is not the time to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle. switching is in a standby state.

After that, at timing t10, it becomes possible to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, the period between the timing t9 when the operating device 48 for presentation is operated and the timing t10 which is the timing when switching to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle is performed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 266. less than the time required to complete the decoding process for H.273c. Therefore, switching to the B-angle video data group 264 to 266 does not occur at the timing t10. At the timing t10, reading and decoding of the B-angle moving image data 272a to 272c have not yet started.

After that, at the timing of t11, with respect to the timing of t12, which is the timing at which switching to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle is possible, a period corresponding to the period enabling decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is obtained. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t11, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272c in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle is started as shown in FIG. 100(g). Specifically, in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, the moving image data 272c of the switching destination this time is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and decoding processing is performed on the moving image data 272c. be started. A plurality of pieces of still image data after the decoding process are written to the moving image data area 211b. In addition, when reading out and decoding the one piece of moving image data 272c, the moving image data area 211b is set so as not to erase the still image data created from the one piece of moving image data 271a currently being displayed. data is set.

After that, at timing t12, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, display of a moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, which has been decoded at the timing t12, is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100(f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(c), at timing t13, a timing to switch to the first moving image data group 267 of C angle occurs. However, since the effect operation device 48 has not been operated by the time t13, angle switching does not occur. The moving image display using the moving image data 272c is continued.

As described above, when the effect operation device 48 is operated immediately before the timing at which the angle can be switched, the angle is switched at the next timing at which the angle can be switched. The angle is switched at the timing when the decoding of the data 271a to 273c is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when the angles are switched.

A specific processing configuration for executing the angle display rendering will be described below. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for angle display effects executed by the display CPU 201 . Note that the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the opening/closing execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

If it is the opening period immediately before starting the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), an opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period set before the start of display of the moving image by any one of angles A to C, and the display of the moving image by any one of angles A to C will start during the opening period. and that the angle can be changed by operating the operating device 48 for presentation. Also, during the opening period, it is possible to select the angle to be displayed at the start timing of the moving image display based on the operation of the production operating device 48 .

The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is a period for reading moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period is set first to enable angle selection, and then a reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operating device 48 is electrically connected to the sound and light side MPU 62 , and an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 201 when the effect operating device 48 is operated.

If an operation generation command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), an angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is updated (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. An angle counter value of "0" corresponds to the A angle, an angle counter value of "1" corresponds to the B angle, and an angle counter value of "2". corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period has started, the value of the angle counter is "0", the operation generation command is received, the processing of step S4203 is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. Further, when the value of the angle counter becomes "3" after adding 1, the value of the angle counter is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, if it is the readout period of the moving image data 271a-273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a-273c corresponding to the current value in the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is "0", the moving image data 271a of the first sequence in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "1", the moving image data 271a of the B angle is grasped. The moving image data 272a of the first order in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the moving image data 273a of the first order in the first moving image data group 267 of C angle is grasped. do. After that, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

When a negative determination is made in step S4202, when the processing of step S4203 is executed, or when the processing of step S4205 is executed, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing in the opening period is grasped (step S4206), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

When the opening processing is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains the various image data grasped in step S4206 arranged in the world coordinate system. set as a target. Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. Opening information is set in the drawing list. By executing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, the image for the opening period is displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG.

Further, when the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list, and the moving image data 271a to 273c ascertained in step S4204 are stored. Information of the address of the memory module 203 in which the moving image data 271a to 273c are to be developed as still image data is set in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the addresses of the moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the moving image data 271a to 273c are converted to still images from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be developed as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read from the address of the memory module 203 ascertained in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the decoded still image data group is written in each area of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), on condition that an operation generation command is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES ), the operation reception flag provided in the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4104). The operation acceptance flag is a flag for specifying in the display CPU 201 that the angle should be switched. Only one operation acceptance flag is provided, and even if the production operating device 48 is operated a plurality of times before the switching of the angle occurs, the operation of the production operating device 48 will not be accepted for the second and subsequent operations. Only the state in which the flag is set to "1" is maintained. As will be described in detail later, when the operation acceptance flag is set to "1", the current angle is changed to the next order no matter how many times the production operation device 48 is operated until the angle is switched. of angles occurs. As a result, when the angle is switched, the angle is switched in a predetermined order as the content of the angle display effect displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In the arithmetic processing for angle display effects, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is time to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c. The timing at which decoding can be started is the timing at which angle switching is possible (timing t1, timing t2, timing t4, timing t7, timing t8, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13 in FIG. 100). timing) is set as an image update timing a predetermined period before, in other words, a predetermined number of times before. More specifically, the period between the timing at which decoding can be started and the timing at which switching is possible is shorter than the period during which moving image display is performed using one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. corresponds to the image update timing two times before the switchable timing immediately after. It should be noted that whether or not it is time to decode moving image data is determined based on the angle display effect execution table read out from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when starting the angle display effect.

If it is time to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4106). If the operation acceptance flag is not set to "1" (step S4106: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4107). The timing counter is set to the same moving image data group 261 when the same moving image data group 261 to 269 continues to be displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c without angle switching. 269 is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify the timing of executing the decoding process of the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in . The timing counter is set to "3" when decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is newly executed, and the moving image data 271a to 273c is set in a situation where the same moving image data 271a to 273c are used. The value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" every time the decode timing of . It should be noted that the value of the timing counter is "3" at the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect.

If the value of the timing counter after the subtraction of "1" is "0" (step S4108: YES), it is the timing of decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in the same moving image data group 261 to 269. It means that there is In this case, decoding processing for moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

Specifically, first, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As already described, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is pre-stored in the memory module 203 in one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, B angle, and C angle. The moving image correspondence table 275 predetermines the relationship between the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur and the type of switching destination moving image data 271a to 273c at the switching timing. Also, at each angle, the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 create new moving image data 271a to 273c. Since the timing at which switching can occur is different and the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c to be switched to is also different, the above data is set in the moving image correspondence table 275 for each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be used. there is

FIG. 104(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG. 104(a).

As shown in FIG. 104(a), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 271c can occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. 1 is added to the pointer information to be referenced. Further, when the display of an image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display effect, the pointer information to be referenced is "0". The updating of the pointer information to be referred to is continued without being cleared to "0" in the middle until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c in the angle display effect is completed. Therefore, the pointer information "16" means that the image has been updated 16 times using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and the pointer information "32" means that the moving image data has been updated 16 times. This means that the image has been updated 32 times using 271a to 271c.

One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to switching. As already explained, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order corresponds to the moving image data 271a in the previous order. On the other hand, it corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses by the number of still image data that can be displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a. Therefore, for the first moving image data group 261, the first moving image data 271a is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a is On the other hand, pointer information corresponding to each value obtained by multiplying by an integer is set as pointer information corresponding to switching. Information on the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically, the area in which each moving image data 271a is expanded in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204, for each of the pointer information corresponding to each switching. Address information is set.

Each moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261, as described above. is doing. Therefore, for the second moving image data group 262, the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order is the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. For the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is used as pointer information corresponding to switching. , the pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 is set.

Each moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261, as described above. is doing. Therefore, for the third moving image data group 263, the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271c in the first order is the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. For the moving image data 271c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is pointer information corresponding to switching. , the pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the second reference period K2 is set.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for angle display effects (FIG. 101), after reading the moving image correspondence table 275, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read out and decoded this time are grasped (step S4110). For this determination, the target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to identify which of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. When the value of the target moving image counter is "0", it corresponds to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. When the value of the target moving image counter is "1", it corresponds to the second moving image data groups 262, 265. , 268, and the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 corresponds to the case where the value of the target moving image counter is "2". In step S4110, based on the value of the target moving image counter, the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read are specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read out in step S4109. Among the pointer information corresponding to the switching set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read, a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect is used as the current pointer information. On the other hand, the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set in correspondence with the pointer information corresponding to switching with the closest value is grasped. As a result, the display CPU 201 grasps the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read and decoded this time.

After that, the timing counter of the work RAM 202 is set to "3" (step S4111), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, decode designation information is set in the current drawing list, and information on the addresses of the memory module 203 where the moving image data 271a to 273c ascertained in step S4110 are stored, and the moving image data. In the data area 211b, the address of the area for developing the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data is set. The VDP 205 that has received the drawing list executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as already described, thereby reading the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read out from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b. and writes each still image data after the decoding process to a designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

On the other hand, in the arithmetic processing for angle display rendering (FIG. 101), if it is time to start decoding and the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (steps S4105 and S4106: YES), the operation is executed. The reception flag is cleared to "0" (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). The switching reference table 276 indicates the switching destination angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 in relation to the current angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 when the angle is changed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for presentation. It is a table for specifying .

FIG. 104(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 104(b), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur. The contents of the pointer information are the same as those described for the moving picture correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104(a). Pointer information corresponding to switching is set corresponding to switching possible timing of each of the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269. It is Specifically, the pointer information corresponding to the first switching is the pointer information of the timing when the moving image display has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. pointer information is set at a timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the immediately preceding switching.

Information on the correspondence between the current angle and the combination of the angle of the switching destination and the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set for each pointer information corresponding to the switching. Specifically, as already explained, when the angle is changed with the operation of the production operation device 48 as a trigger, A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→ . . . Angle switching occurs in this order. Also, the timing at which switching to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 is possible, the timing at which switching is possible to the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268, and the timing at which switching is possible to the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 are The content is as described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104(a). Therefore, the correspondence relationship is as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for angle display effects (FIG. 101), after reading the switching reference table 276, the setting processing of the angle counter and target moving image counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting process, among the pointer information corresponding to switching set in the switching reference table 276, the value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and the closest value to the current pointer information is selected for switching. , and the information set corresponding to the current angle in the pointer information corresponding to the switching is specified. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is "10" and the current angle is the A angle, the information of the B angle is specified as the information of the angle to be switched based on the switching reference table 276, and the switching is performed. The information of the second moving image data group 265 is specified as the information of the previous moving image data groups 261-269. Further, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is "68" and the current angle is the C angle, based on the switching reference table 276, the A angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information, Information on the third moving image data group 263 is specified as information on the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be switched to. The specified switching destination angle information is set in the angle counter, and the information of the specified switching destination moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set in the target moving image counter.

After executing the processes of steps S4113 to S4115, the processes of steps S4109 to S4112 already described are executed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read out, and in step S4110, the value of the target moving image counter newly set in step S4115 is read out. The moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped.

In the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the types of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processing of steps S4109 to S4112 is executed, the change trigger flag provided in work RAM 202 is set to "1". In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to "1" and the switching of the moving image data 271a to 273c becomes possible, the timing for changing the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c is reached. Affirmative judgment is made as it is. The switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is as already explained, and the first switching timing corresponds to the timing when the moving image display has progressed by the first reference period K1 from the start timing of the angle display effect. The subsequent switchable timing corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 from the immediately preceding switchable timing.

If it is time to change the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). Note that the change trigger flag is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S4116. The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which still image data among the moving image data 271a to 273c developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. is. When the value of the frame counter is "0", the still image data in the first order in one piece of expanded moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped as the object to be used. If still image data is determined to be used in step S4118, which will be described later, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4118, still images in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the addition of 1 are displayed. Data is captured for use.

If a negative determination is made in step S4116, or if the process of step S4117 is executed, the still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at this update timing (step S4118). . In this case, 1 is added to the value of the frame counter. In addition, other image data required to display the image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4119), and parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 is calculated. It is derived (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

When the arithmetic processing for the angle display effects is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119. is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. Also, angle effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105, the VDP 205 first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 (step S4401), and then step S4119. Other image data grasped in (step S4402). Furthermore, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data ascertained in steps S4401 and S4402 are set in the world coordinate system while applying the parameter information ascertained in step S4403 (step S4404). As a result, the drawing data for displaying the image for the angle display effect is finally created, and the image for the angle display effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Note that the angle display effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

As described above, each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c. The switching timing can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among A-angle, B-angle and C-angle during execution of the angle display effect.

Further, the amount of data of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that still image data for the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. As a result, it becomes possible to set many timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data read out at one time.

A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 are provided for displaying the same moving image at each angle A to C, respectively. In each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 have a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c for the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267. , and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 are still images that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c for the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268. It is shifted by a first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of data units. As a result, it is possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in the predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in each angle. It is possible to cause an angle change at an early stage.

The moving image data 271a to 273c are not collectively read for each angle to be selected. When it is time to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c, one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read out and decoded. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read the moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. FIG.

In a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next are read and decoded. As a result, when new moving image data 271a to 273c are to be used, waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c can be avoided.

In the configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for presentation, even if the operation timing of the operation device 48 for presentation is before the switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c, it is after the decoding start timing. In this case, the change of the angle for the operation of the performance operating device 48 is not at the immediately following switchable timing, but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately following switchable timing. This makes it possible to smoothly switch the angle for the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation.

<Another form of angle display effect>
・The number of images that can be displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same configuration, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least part of the moving image data is different from the other moving images. The configuration may be different from that of the data. In this case, it is necessary to set the timing at which switching to the new moving image data 271a to 273c and the timing at which decoding can be started are set according to the type of each moving image data 271a to 273c.

In a configuration in which moving image display using moving image data is started when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period, the moving image display starts from the timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the operation valid period. A moving image data group that enables a series of specific moving images to be displayed for the configuration to be started, and another moving image data group that enables to display a moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of the specific moving image. and may be applied separately.

- The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types. Also, the types of angles are not limited to three types, and may be two types, or may be four types or more.

<Configuration for performing a special video use effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a special moving image use effect will be described.

The special moving image use effect is an effect using the special moving image data 282 when the image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282. FIG. 106(a) shows the normal moving image data 281 such as the already explained moving image data 271a to 273c, and FIG. 106(b). indicates special moving image data 282 .

As shown in FIG. 106(a), in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes one frame of I-picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to the second difference data. and have

The I-picture data is data that can be used alone to create one frame of still image data when decoded. P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before when decoding. . B-picture data can be bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames after when decoding. , is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. B-picture data is set as the m+1-th, . . . , n-1-th frame data. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

By executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 281, still image data 283a to 283d for a plurality of update timings (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 283a to 283d) are stored in the VRAM 204 from the normal moving image data 281. It will be created in the moving picture data area 211b. In this case, these normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are different from each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the special moving image data 282 has file data set at the first address followed by one frame of I picture data corresponding to reference data. , compressed data other than the I-picture data is not set. By executing a decoding process on the special moving image data 282 , still image data 284 for a plurality of update timings (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284 ) from the special moving image data 282 is stored in the moving image data area of the VRAM 204 . 211b. However, these special decoded image data 284 are image data in which the contents of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 284 are all the same.

The data amount of the special moving image data 282 is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, for the still image data for the minimum number of units, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (update 48 frames). ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the minimum unit number of special decoded image data 284 having the same image content is created. As described above, the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 have the data amount set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. However, the amount of normal moving image data 281 other than the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that it is possible to create more still image data than the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data. there is

The special moving image data 282 is pre-stored in the memory module 203 like the normal moving image data 281, and the memory module 203 stores a plurality of types of special moving image data 282. FIG. The content of the image based on the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process differs for each type of the special moving image data 282 .

Special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, the memory module 203 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data. Any type of image can be displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an individual image symbolizing an object is displayed.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it becomes possible to store one piece of texture data as moving image data in the memory module 203 . As described above, the texture data pre-stored in the memory module 203 as still image data are all read from the memory module 203 and stored in the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. It is written to the texture area 211 a in the buffer 211 . In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out to the texture area 211a is changed each time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase.

On the other hand, by storing part of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out part of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. becomes. Also, since it is not stored as texture data in the memory module 203 but as the special moving image data 282, texture data can be created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. becomes possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the texture data itself is not read into the moving image data area 211b, but the special moving image data 282 is read. There is no need to change the handling of the video data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read to the video data area 211b.

Next, how the special moving image use effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 107(a) shows the start timing of supply of operating power, FIG. 107(b) shows the reading period of texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107(c) shows the 107(d) shows the start timing of the special moving image use effect, and FIG. 107(e) shows the execution period of the special moving image use effect during which the special moving image data 282 is used. FIG. 107(f) shows the reading period of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107(g) shows the use period of the special moving image data 282. .

At the timing t1, the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started as shown in FIG. 107(a). is started, and the reading of the texture data is completed at the timing of t2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107(c), all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 are stored and held in the texture area 211a while the supply of operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued. . Since backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, texture data cannot be stored in the texture area 211a when the supply of operating power to the display control device 200 is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 107(d), it becomes the start timing of the special animation use effect. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing t3, the object data read from the memory module 203 to an area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 as necessary, and the texture when the supply of operating power is started. Rendering data is created using the texture data read out to the display area 211a, and an image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 using the rendering data.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 107(f), reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b starts. At the same time, the special moving image data 282 read into the moving image data area 211b is decoded. Then, at timing t5, the decoding processing of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and a plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding processing on the special moving image data 282 are used for moving image data. It is written to area 211b.

At timing t5 when the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, display of an image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107(g). In this case, the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data to be pasted on the predetermined object data, and the predetermined object data and the special decoded image data 284 are projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Drawing data is created. Then, an image is displayed using the special decoded image data 284 by displaying an image on the pattern display device 41 using the drawing data. Thereafter, at timing t6, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends.

A specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image use effect will be described below. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a special moving image use effect executed by the display CPU 201 . Note that the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the game turn in which the special moving image use effect is to be executed.

If it is not the usage period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is stored by referring to the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the execution of the special moving image use effect. It is determined whether or not it is read timing (step S4502). If it is time to read the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read and decoded this time is grasped (step S4502). Note that there are a plurality of types of special moving image use effects, and the types of special moving image data 282 to be used are different for each type of special moving image use effect. Also, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

After that, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing are grasped (step S4505), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). The various image data grasped in step S4505 include the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read out to the texture area 211a.

When the arithmetic processing for the effect using the special moving image is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains the various image data grasped in step S4505. It is set as a placement target in the coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. In addition, special moving image use effect information is set in the drawing list.

Further, when the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list, and the special moving image data 282 ascertained in step S4503 is stored. Information about the address of the memory module 203 and the address of the area for developing the special moving image data 282 as the special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is converted into special decoded image data from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area developed as H.284 is grasped (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, a plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 resulting from the decoding are written in each area of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 are written in the moving image data area 211b.

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect (FIG. 108), if it is the use period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at this update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is used by the display CPU 201 to specify which of the special decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 developed in the moving image data area 211b is to be used. is a counter. The frame counter is also used when the normal moving image data 281 is used, such as angle display effects. When the use period of the special moving image data 282 is started, the value of the frame counter is "0". special decoded image data 284 of . Also, when the special decoded image data 284 is determined to be used in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4508, special decoding is performed in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after incrementing by 1. The image data 284 is grasped as the object to be used.

Here, as already explained, the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the special decoded image data 284 is The content of the image displayed using On the other hand, when using special decoded image data 284 as texture data, special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one piece of special decoded image data 284 . This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281 .

After that, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing of this time are grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. After that, parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and use instruction information for the special moving image data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

When the arithmetic processing for the effect using the special moving image is executed as described above, various images grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). The data is set for placement in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. In addition, use instruction information for the special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the special moving image data use instruction information is set, the VDP 205 executes setting processing for the special moving image use effect. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, in the setting processing for the special moving image use effect, if the use instruction information for the special moving image data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding ascertained in step S4508 is performed. The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). Further, the other image data grasped at step S4509 is grasped (step S4603), and the parameter information grasped at step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). Then, the image data ascertained in steps S4602 and S4603 are set in the world coordinate system while applying the parameter information ascertained in step S4604 (step S4605). As a result, the drawing data for displaying the image for the special moving image use effect using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for the special moving image use effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. It will be done. Note that the special moving image use effect setting processing is performed when a drawing list in which special moving image use effect information or special moving image data use instruction information is set is received. is executed in the setting process of

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it is possible to store one texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As described above, the texture data pre-stored in the memory module 203 as still image data are all read from the memory module 203 and stored in the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. It is written to the texture area 211 a in the buffer 211 . In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out to the texture area 211a is changed each time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase.

On the other hand, by storing part of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out part of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. becomes. Also, since it is not stored as texture data in the memory module 203 but as the special moving image data 282, texture data can be created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. becomes possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the texture data itself is not read into the moving image data area 211b, but the special moving image data 282 is read. There is no need to change the handling of the video data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read to the video data area 211b.

One type of special decoded image data 284 is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 . This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

A plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing a decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 is different. The content is identical. On the other hand, when using special decoded image data 284 as texture data, special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one piece of special decoded image data 284 . This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281 .

The special moving image data 282 has only I-picture data and does not have differential data such as B-picture data and P-picture data. This makes it possible to simplify the data configuration of the special moving image data 282 .

The special moving image data 282 is set as the minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data. This makes it possible to keep the data volume of the special moving image data 282 small.

<Another form regarding the use of special videos>
- Not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the object data to the VRAM 204 at appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each generation timing of the drawing data.

- Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, only one or a part of the types may be used. Even in this case, texture data can be handled as moving image data.

- It is good also as a structure by which only one image data is produced by performing a decoding process on the special moving image data 282. FIG. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 .

The special moving image data 282 may be configured such that only the same I picture data is set in plural numbers, and when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, image data corresponding to the number of I picture data is created. .

- A plurality of image data of the same type are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, but only one image data among them may be used. In this case, only one piece of image data among the plurality of pieces of image data created by executing the decoding process may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the rest may be deleted.

A separate storage area is provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and all or part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282 is stored in the separate storage area. It may be configured to be transferred. In this case, the image data can be stored in the separate storage area even after use, and the image data can be read out from the separate storage area when used next time, so that the special moving image data 282 There is no need to perform decoding processing again for .

- Although the special moving image data 282 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, the difference data may be set so that the difference is "0". Even in this case, it is possible to create a plurality of special decoded image data 284 of the same type.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) The processing configuration of the sound and light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment are changed to a configuration for displaying a 3D image on the pattern display device 41 as in the second embodiment. may be applied to Further, the processing configuration of the sound and light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are changed to a configuration for displaying a 2D image on the pattern display device 41 as in the first embodiment. may apply.

(2) In the second embodiment, the cameras (viewpoints) are individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. A single camera may be set in common for image data.

(3) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, effect image, and pattern image. may be projected together, may be configured to be projected collectively in units of effect images and symbol images, or may be configured to be collectively projected.

(4) In the second embodiment, when performing the color information setting process (step S2609), the configuration may be such that the color information is set such that the texture is applied only to the surface to be projected. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, the configuration may be such that color information such as texture mapping is set after projection. In this case, upon projection, the coordinate information of each pixel forming the projection plane is stored, and color information such as texture mapping is set based on the coordinate information.

(5) Display control based on commands sent from the main controller 50 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on commands sent from the main controller 50 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 50 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 50 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are arbitrary.

(6) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means stores special moving image data (special moving image data 282), which is one type of image data created by executing a decoding process and used by the display control means, in the display storage means. A game machine characterized by being stored in

According to the feature A1, the special moving image data, which is one type of image data to be used by the display control means after the decoding process is executed, is provided. It becomes possible to handle it as image data. This makes it possible to use one type of image data while preventing an increase in the volume of image data similar to that of the one type of image data after decoding.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data from which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

According to the feature A2, when the special moving image data is decoded, not a plurality of types of image data are generated, but only one type of image data is generated. Therefore, unnecessary image data is generated. It is possible to achieve the above-described effects while preventing the user from being overwhelmed.

Feature A3. The game according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data from which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content are created by executing the decoding process. machine.

According to feature A3, when decoding processing is performed on special moving image data, a plurality of special image data having the same content is created. , the special image data having the same content can be used at the update timing of a plurality of images.

Feature A4. The display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data when the update timing of the image is a predetermined update timing, and performs the following processing with respect to the predetermined update timing. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the special image data in the order next to the predetermined order is used when it is the update timing of .

According to feature A4, a plurality of pieces of special image data having the same content are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data, and the pieces of special image data are used in a predetermined order. As a result, the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is treated as the image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data. It is possible to treat them in the same way.

Feature A5. Moving image data other than the special moving image data includes reference data (I picture data) that serves as a reference when creating the image data by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the reference data. and difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can create image data different from the image data created by the reference data by applying to
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data includes the reference data and does not include the difference data.

According to feature A5, since the special moving image data has reference data and does not have difference data, only one type of image data is created when the decoding process is executed. can be simplified. Also, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data small.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data.

According to feature A6, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data small.

Feature A7. The display control means is a predetermined process execution means (a step in the VDP 205) for displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (texture data) by executing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means. function to execute the processing of S2609),
When an image corresponding to the special image data generated by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is displayed, the predetermined process executing means executes the predetermined process on the special image data. and
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the display storage means to the read storage means (VRAM 204),
The reading storage means includes a first reading area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second reading area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that

According to feature A7, when image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the display storage means, but is used after being read out once to the read storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, the image data can be immediately used when the image data is used in the display control means. Further, the reading memory means is provided with a first reading area from which the predetermined image data is read and a second reading area from which the special moving image data is read. The area is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, it becomes possible to designate the area according to the type of the image data.

In this case, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and although only one type of special image data is used by the display control means, the special image data is used for display as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. stored in storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first readout area.

Feature A8. a plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage means;
The game machine is
a first read execution means (function for executing the process of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) that reads out all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first read area when a predetermined read timing has come;
In a situation where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area, when image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area, a second reading execution means (function for executing decoding processing in the VDP 205) that overwrites the image data already stored in the second reading area with the image data;
The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read into the first readout area, it is not necessary to read out the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, moving image data is read into the second read area as necessary, and when new moving image data is read, the second read area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second readout area. In this case, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and although only one type of special image data is used by the display control means, the special image data is used for display as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. stored in storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first readout area.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the first reading executing means reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first reading area when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature A9, it is possible to quickly create a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data have been read out to the first readout area.

Feature A10. Any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The game machine described.

According to the feature A10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described when texture data is used.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
Data for determining the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image when the individual image (symbols displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3) is to be displayed in a specific variable display over a predetermined period on the display unit. information storage means (memory module 74),
The display control means is
Object determination means (display CPU 72) for determining at least one of the types of the individual images to which the mode determination information is applied in the plurality of types of individual images and the order in which the mode determination information is applied to the plurality of types of individual images a function of executing the processes of steps S908 and S1011 in
application executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) for performing the specific variation display by applying the mode determination information in accordance with the content determined by the object determining means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, the mode determination information is commonly applied to multiple types of individual images. As a result, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for various situations in which the specific variable display is performed, and it is possible to reduce the number of mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the mode determination information in the information storage means.

Feature B2. When the specific variable display is newly started, the display is controlled so that the individual image of the type to be displayed at the start of the specific variable display starts the variable display in a predetermined variable start mode, and is displayed at the start of the specific variable display. the type of individual image to be rendered is a variable configuration;
at least information for causing the individual image to perform a variable display according to the predetermined variable start mode is set as the mode determination information;
The target determination means is adapted to apply the mode determination information to a plurality of types of the individual images according to the type of the individual images displayed at the start of the specific variable display, and the plurality of types of the individual images to which the mode determination information is applied. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein at least one of the order of applying the mode determination information in the individual image is determined.

According to the feature B2, the state of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is kept constant at a predetermined variable start state, thereby making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the specific variable display has started. . Also, even if the aspect of the variable display is constant at the start of the specific variable display, the type of the individual image displayed at the start may change, so that the specific variable display is started. It is possible to diversify the aspects in

In this configuration, information for performing variable display of the individual image in a predetermined variable start mode at the start of the specific variable display is set in the mode determination information, and is displayed at the start of the specific variable display. At least one of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied and the order of the individual image is determined in a manner corresponding to the type of individual image. As a result, even in a configuration where the type of individual image displayed at the start of the specific variable display can change, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B3. The individual image of a type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variable display was terminated last time is displayed at the start of the specific variable display in the next execution. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to feature B3, the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific change display was completed last time is displayed at the start of the specific change display in the next execution. When the display is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give continuity to each execution of the specific variable display. In this case, at the start of the specific variable display, the type of the individual image for which the variable display is started differs according to the predetermined variable start mode. Even in a configuration in which the type of individual image displayed at the start of the variable display can change, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determination information, mode information (contents of tasks) for determining the mode of the specific variable display is set in chronological order,
The target determining means determines the type of the individual image to which the mode information is applied, and the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variable display changes as the specific variable display progresses. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the game machine is determined corresponding to the situation.

According to feature B4, even if the type of the individual image to be executed in the specific variable display changes as the specific variable display progresses, the mode information set in chronological order in the mode determination information is applied. The type of individual image to be processed is determined respectively. This makes it possible to commonly use the mode determination information even in a configuration in which the type of the individual image to be executed in the specific variable display changes as the specific variable display progresses.

Feature B5. Any one of characteristics B1 to B4, wherein the mode determination information is set as information corresponding to a period equal to or longer than the longest duration assumed as a situation in which the mode determination information is used. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature B5, it is possible to use the mode determination information in common regardless of the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used.

Feature B6. The duration of the situation in which the mode determination information is used is a predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied. The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the use of the mode determining information is set to end.

In the case of a configuration in which the mode determination information is set corresponding to the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used, the mode determination is made in the middle of the time-series information set in the mode determination information. It is assumed that the timing for using the control information ends, and the next control information is to be used. In this case, according to feature B6, the end timing of use of the mode determination information is predetermined from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the type of individual image to which the mode determination information is applied. The timing is set. As a result, it is possible to make the situation for starting the use of the next control information constant, thereby facilitating the design of the control information.

It should be noted that the "predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied" includes "application target of the mode determination information. "timing at which the type of the individual image is switched" is also included.

Feature B7. The mode determination information is
A mode information group (task content) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific variable display is set in chronological order;
a target information group (display pattern adjustment area) in which a plurality of pieces of target information to which information about the type of the individual image to which the mode information is applied is set are set in association with the mode information;
with
The object determination means is characterized in that, when starting to use the mode determination information, the object determination means sets information on the type of the individual image for each of the object information included in the object information group. The game machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

According to the feature B7, since the mode determination information includes the mode information group and the target information group, it is possible to identify the target to which the mode information is applied at each update timing by simply referring to the mode determination information. It is possible to grasp the type of image. In this case, when starting to use the mode determination information, information about the type of individual image is set for each of the target information included in the target information group of the mode determination information. As a result, there is no need to execute processing for adjusting the type of individual image to be applied during execution of the specific variation display, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during execution of the specific variation display.

Feature B8. The specific variable display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variable display areas,
The game according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determination information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas. machine.

According to the feature B8, since the mode determination information is commonly used for the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas, it is possible to reduce the number of mode determination information.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B8, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means includes simultaneous display control means (display CPU 72) for simultaneously displaying the first type image (loop display character G4) and the second type image (loop display background G5) on the display unit. Equipped with a function to execute arithmetic processing for character loops and arithmetic processing for background loops, VDP 76),
The gaming machine includes first mode determination information (character movement table 123) in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and display mode of the second type image. Information storage means (memory module 74) for pre-storing second mode determination information (background table 124) in which second mode information for determining
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and A gaming machine, wherein the display mode of the second type image is determined according to the information for determining the second mode.

According to the feature C1, in the configuration in which the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time, the mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one mode. Instead of being provided as determination information, first mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and second mode determination information for determining the display mode of the second type image are provided separately. As a result, while one of the first type image and the second type image is statically displayed, the other is variably displayed, and then the statically displayed image is varied from the statically displayed state. Even when the display is restarted, it is possible to control the display of each type of image independently by using the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time.

Feature C2. The information for determining the first mode is
a first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of first reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the simultaneous display control means is set every time the first type image is updated;
A first mode information group (task task) in which the first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set so as to correspond to each of the first reference information content) and
with
The information for determining the second mode is
a second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of second reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the simultaneous display control means is set every time the update timing of the second type image is reached;
A second mode information group (task task) in which the second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set in association with each of the second reference information content) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set for the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set for the second mode determination information. As a result, while one of the information for determination of the first mode and the information for determination of the second mode is not used, the reference information to be referred to by the other is continued to be updated, or the reference information to be referred to by the other is updated. Predetermined reference information can be held.

Feature C3. The information for determining the first mode is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in the first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The information storage means stores information for determining a third mode (character retention table 122) in which information for displaying the first type image in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in chronological order. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, which stores in advance.

According to the feature C3, even when the first type image is displayed, different mode determination information is provided corresponding to different contents of the variation mode. As a result, when switching between a situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and a situation in which the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, the mode to be used is determined. It is only necessary to switch the information for determination between the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the third mode, and it is possible to suitably switch between these variation modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means is
First simultaneous display control means (steps S1102 to S1104, steps S1109 to S1113 and steps A function to execute the processing of S1202 to S1206);
Second simultaneous display control means (steps S1105 to S1113 and a function to execute the processing of steps S1207 to S1208;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C4, there are a situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed, and a situation in which one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is statically displayed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, since the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided, the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information can be switched when switching the display state. It suffices to switch the usage status of the second mode determination information, and it is possible to suitably switch these display statuses.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means controls the display unit so that the first type image is displayed in a first variation mode and the second type image is displayed in a second variation mode,
The second simultaneous display control means performs display control on the display unit so that the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image is statically displayed,
The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to display in the first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The information storage means stores in advance third mode determination information (character dwell table 122) in which information for displaying the first type image in the different variation mode is set in chronological order. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized by:

According to feature C5, the first type image is variably displayed in the first variation mode and the second type image is variably displayed in the second variation mode, and the first type image is different from the first variation mode. Diversification of the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed by generating a situation in which the second type image is statically displayed while being variably displayed according to the variation mode. It becomes possible to plan In this case, the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the third mode are separately provided for the first type images, and the information for determining the second mode is separately provided for the second type images. ing. As a result, when switching the display state, the object to be used for the first type image is switched between the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the third mode, and for the second type image, the information for determining the second mode is selected. It is only necessary to switch between the status of updating the information to be used and the status of fixing it in the information for use. Therefore, it is possible to suitably switch these display states.

Feature C6. In the information for determining the first mode, information necessary for causing the first type image to display a series of first variation modes for one round is set in chronological order,
The simultaneous display control means is characterized in that it is possible to repeatedly display the series of the first variation mode by the first type image by repeatedly using the information for determining the first mode. The game machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

According to the characteristic C6, by repeatedly using the information for determining the first mode, it is possible to cause the first type image to repeatedly display a series of the first variation modes. If the information for variably displaying the first type image and the information for variably displaying the second type image are integrated and set as one mode determination information, the first type image will have a series of first When one rotation of the display of the variation mode ends and the next rotation starts, unless the display content of the second type image also starts one rotation, the first type image will be displayed. It is necessary to set more information than one round for displaying one variation mode. In this case, information for more than one round is wasted. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature C1 and separately providing the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information, it is not necessary to set such useless information.

Feature C7. In the information for determining the second mode, information necessary for causing the second type image to display a series of second variation modes for one round is set in chronological order,
The simultaneous display control means is capable of repeatedly displaying the series of the second variation mode by the second type image by repeatedly using the information for determining the second mode,
The number of update timings of the first type image required to cause the first type image to be displayed in the first variation mode for one cycle, and the second type image to be displayed in the second variation mode once. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the number of update timings of the second type image required for the rotation is different.

According to the feature C7, the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the second mode are separately provided, so that only the information corresponding to one round of each of the first variation mode and the second variation mode can be set in each mode determination information, and there is no need to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means is
When starting the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, the start information is set in the start information storage means (interlocking flag 125), and the display according to the first mode determination information is performed. means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when ending the display of the first type image (function for executing the processes of steps S1103 and S1107 in the display CPU 72);
means for displaying the second type image in accordance with the second mode determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage means (the display CPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201); function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C8, the start information is set when the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, and the start information is erased when the display is finished, and the start information is set, the second type image is displayed in accordance with the second mode determination information. , the second mode determining information can be used in conjunction with the use of the first mode determining information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the information amount of the usage start timing information in a configuration in which the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided.

For the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
First set range control means (display CPU 72) for displaying the first set range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) to the first set range. A function for executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in VDP 76);
second set range control means for displaying a second set range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second set range different from the first set range; (Function for executing the processing of steps S1311 to S1313 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, by changing the range to be set in the setting storage means between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data, the first setting range image and the second setting range can be obtained. It is possible to display each of the two set range images. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even when there are few types of image data.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first set range and the second set range partially overlap.

According to feature D2, since the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap, while using the same specific image data, the first setting range image and the second setting range image It is possible to produce slight image changes.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second set range image is displayed at an update timing of an image subsequent to the display of the first set range image.

According to the feature D3, the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the image next to the display of the first setting range image, so that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed as a series of images. can be used as

Feature D4. When both the first set range image and the second set range image include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. A configuration in which the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed in
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second set range image moves in the predetermined direction with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first set range image. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the first set range and the second set range are set so as to correspond to display positions.

According to feature D4, it is possible to display an image in which a predetermined individual image moves in a predetermined direction, using a small number of image data.

Feature D5. Characteristic feature D4, wherein the first set range image and the second set range image are images in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed in an effect period in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed. game machine.

According to feature D5, the same specific image data is used because the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed using the same specific image data in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed. It becomes difficult to notice what you are doing.

Feature D6. the data size of the specific image data is set in the setting storage means to be larger than the data size of the area to be displayed on the display unit;
Any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the first set range and the second set range correspond to a range that fills the entire area to be displayed on the display section in the setting storage means. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature D6, it is possible to make it inconspicuous that the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed using the same specific image data.

Feature D7. Any one of the characteristics D1 to D6, wherein the specific image data is image data created by executing a decoding process on moving image data stored in the display storage means. The game machine described.

Even if the number of image data generated by decoding moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing, the same specific image data can be generated with the configuration of feature D1. Since it is possible to display different images such as the first setting range image and the second setting range image by using it, it is possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between a plurality of update timings. .

Feature D8. The plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. and
The first set range control means and the second set range control means apply the first set range and the second set range to each of the plurality of image data. The game machine described.

According to feature D8, while using the same processing configuration, the number of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing. It becomes possible to

Feature D9. The plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. and
displaying the second setting range image at an update timing of an image subsequent to the display of the first setting range image;
A second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second set range image is positioned relative to a first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first set range image. The first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to the display position moved in the direction,
The display position of the predetermined individual image in the image displayed next to the second set range image using next use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data. is the same or substantially the same movement amount as the movement amount from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second set range image, the predetermined individual image is a display position moved in the predetermined direction.

According to feature D9, even when the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed from the same specific image data, the amount of movement of a predetermined individual image in a predetermined direction between a plurality of update timings is can be made constant.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D9, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
The first display content (size position information of band image G24 and position information of flashing image G25) of the predetermined individual image (size position information of band image G24 and position information of blinking image G25) at each update timing when the predetermined individual image (effective period image G22) is displayed in a predetermined manner. , first determining means (step in display CPU 72) for determining first predetermined mode information (band display table 145) in which first predetermined mode information that determines the first display content is set in chronological order a function of executing the processes of S1606, steps S1615 and S1616);
The second display content (the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed according to the predetermined mode is changed to the first predetermined mode. A second determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S1608 and S1613 in the display CPU 72) that determines without using determination information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in a predetermined mode, the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image can be independently and individually controlled. As a result, when diversifying the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image, it becomes possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently, thereby performing the diversification. becomes easier.

Feature E2. The second determining means determines the second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed according to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the information is determined by using second predetermined mode determining information (blinking display table 146) in which information is set in chronological order.

According to feature E2, the information for determining the first predetermined mode that determines the first display content and the information for determining the second predetermined mode that determines the second display content are separately provided, so that each predetermined mode It is possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently while executing display control in accordance with the use information.

Feature E3. The information for determining the first predetermined mode is
A first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the first determination means is set each time the first display content of the predetermined individual image is updated. When,
The first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set so as to correspond to each of the first predetermined reference information. Mode information group (size information and tip position information),
with
The information for determining the second predetermined mode is
A second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of second predetermined reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the second determination means each time the update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is reached. When,
Second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content at each update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is set so as to correspond to each of the second predetermined reference information. mode information group (image data information);
The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set in the first predetermined mode determination information, and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set in the second predetermined mode determination information. there is This makes it easier to independently control the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content.

Feature E4. Means for changing the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content independently of the update cycle of the other (the function of executing the processing of steps S1610 and S1612 in the display CPU 72) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized by:

According to the feature E4, the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently of the update cycle of the other, so that the display mode of the changing display in the predetermined individual image according to the predetermined mode is changed. Diversification can be suitably realized.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in the setting storage means (the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b), and transmits an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. display an image on the display unit based on the output;
The predetermined individual image is displayed using first predetermined individual image data (band display image data 142) and second predetermined individual image data (lighting image data 143, light-off image data 144),
the first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image;
the second display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image;
In order to set the second predetermined individual image data in association with the first predetermined individual image data when setting the second predetermined individual image data in the setting storage means in the first predetermined mode determination information. (tip position information) is set.

According to feature E5, even in a configuration in which the first display content and the second display content can be independently and individually controlled, the second predetermined individual image data can be displayed in a manner associated with the first predetermined individual image data. It becomes possible to easily perform the setting to the setting storage means.

Feature E6. one of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to independently control at least one of the size, shape and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

For the configuration of any one of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
setting storage means (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set;
Derivation means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information that determines a setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means;
creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; Display control means (VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means outputs predetermined types of image data (backmost image data 241, first background individual image image data 242, second background individual image image data 243, effect character image data 244) to the After displaying a predetermined type of image over the front period based on setting in the setting storage means, the predetermined type of image is displayed on the rear side based on setting the predetermined type of image data in the setting storage means. Predetermined type control means (function for executing setting processing for separate storage display in VDP 205) that prevents it from being performed over a period of time,
The parameter information derived by the derivation means for applying to the predetermined type of image data in the front period is stored in a predetermined storage area of predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is the rear period. A gaming machine, wherein the parameter information is stored as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type of image data.

According to the feature F1, even in a situation where the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area storing the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data is stored in the predetermined type of image data. By holding as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type of image data, a process for securing the predetermined storage area when restarting the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data is newly performed. no need to run. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when restarting the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the deriving means updates the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data even in the latter period.

According to the feature F2, since the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined kind of image data is updated even in the later period, the predetermined kind of image using the predetermined kind of image data cannot be displayed after the latter period ends. When restarting, the display state immediately before the start of the rear period is changed from the state in which the content of the predetermined type image continues to change for the rear period in accordance with the display pattern determined in chronological order, to the predetermined type. It is possible to restart the display of the predetermined type of image using the image data.

Feature F3. The predetermined type control means controls the pre-created data (the first separate stored image data 245, the second separate stored image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined type of image data in the setting storage means in the preceding period. ) to create the drawing data in the latter period.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type of image even in the latter period.

Feature F4. The predetermined type control means sets the pre-created data and additional image data (image data 246 for additional individual images and effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the latter period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein drawing data is created.

According to the feature F4, since the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the latter period, it is possible to make the display content flashy. In addition, in the latter period, the predetermined type image data is not used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image, but the pre-created data is used, so the additional image data is added as the image data to be used. However, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F5. The latter period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the former period,
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before a situation in which the predetermined start opportunity may occur in the preceding period.

According to feature F5, the pre-created data is created before a situation in which the predetermined start opportunity can occur. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the timing of occurrence.

Feature F6. If the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before the situation in which the predetermined start opportunity may occur in the preceding period does not occur by the branch timing, the predetermined type control means continues. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the preceding period.

According to feature F6, pre-created data is newly created as needed, so pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing at which pre-created data is actually used can be used. Become.

Feature F7. Any one of the characteristics F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control means creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data in the anterior period so that contents of images displayed by the pre-created data are different. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature F7, by creating multiple types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify situations in which images are displayed using pre-created data.

Feature F8. At least first pre-created data (second separate stored image data 247) and second pre-created data (first separate stored image data 245) are created as the pre-created data,
The trailing period includes a first trailing period and a second trailing period that can occur later than the first trailing period,
The predetermined type control means is
a first pre-creation means for creating the drawing data using the first pre-created data in the first rear period (a function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3912 in the VDP 205);
a second pre-creation means for creating the drawing data using the second pre-created data in the second rear period (a function of executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205);
The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F8, it is possible to use pre-created data suitable for each rear period.

Feature F9. The first rear period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the front period,
The first pre-created data and the second pre-created data are created before the situation in which the predetermined start opportunity may occur in the anterior period,
Characteristic feature F8, wherein the second pre-creation means newly creates the second pre-created data in the continued anterior period when the predetermined start opportunity does not occur in the anterior period. game machine.

According to feature F9, when the first rear period does not occur, the second pre-generated data is newly generated before the second rear period occurs. It is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing of use.

Feature F10. The display control means is
arranging means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information as the image data, in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604 in the VDP 205);
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2605 and S2606 in the VDP 205);
Rendering setting means for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creating the rendering data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (steps S2607 to S2612 of the VDP 205 are executed). functions to perform) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the above feature group A to feature group F can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A first control means (main side MPU 52) and a second control means (sound and light side MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76),
The first control means is
Grant determination means (function for executing special figure special electric control processing in the main side MPU 52) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player;
Information transmission means (function for executing special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of grant determination;
with
The second control means is
Content determination means for determining the content of the unit performance (performance for the game round) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information (function for executing the processing of steps S404 and steps S406 to S408 in the sound and light side MPU 62);
Effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) that controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the unit effect corresponding to the effect content determined by the content determination means is executed;
with
As performance contents that can be determined by the content determining means based on the same type of predetermined correspondence information, a first performance content whose duration of performance corresponds to a first duration and a duration of performance corresponds to a second duration. A gaming machine characterized by including at least a second performance content to be played.

According to the feature G1, it is possible to diversify the contents of the presentation by selecting the contents of the presentation with different durations of the presentation from the predetermined corresponding information of the same type, and the process for determining the contents of the presentation. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in configuration.

Feature G2. The effect execution control means terminates the unit effect when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information elapses regardless of which effect content is determined by the content determination means. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic G2, even if any content of the performance is determined, since the unit performance ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has passed, the duration of the performance differs from the predetermined correspondence information of the same type. Even if the content of the performance can be selected, the duration of the unit performance can be set to the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control means comprises a duration determination means for determining the duration of the unit production (a function of executing a special figure special electric control process in the main side MPU 52),
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that enables the second control means to specify the duration determined by the duration determination means.

According to the characteristic G3, the duration of the unit performance is determined by the first control means, so that even if the second control means performs the execution control of the unit performance, the second control means to the first control means It is possible to grasp the duration of the unit performance in the first control means without transmitting information to. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature G2, even if it is a configuration that allows selection of performance contents with different durations of performance from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the duration of the unit performance is set to the third. 1 the duration determined by the control means.

Feature G4. The performance content determined by the content determination means is characterized in that the duration period corresponding to the performance content is less than or equal to the duration period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the performance content. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or G3.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the unit performance is terminated due to the lapse of the duration of the unit performance during the execution of the performance content determined by the content determination means.

Feature G5. The effect execution control means causes the effect execution means to perform, as the unit effect, an effect in which the pattern is kept in a predetermined area and displayed in a standby state after the pattern is variably displayed,
If the duration of the performance content determined by the content determination means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, means for extending the execution period of the standby display accordingly (step S504 in the sound and light side MPU 62 A game machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the continuation period of the effect content determined by the content determination means and the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated. As a result, there is no need to largely modify the effect content of the unit effect in order to compensate for the difference, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for compensating for the difference.

Feature G6. The content determining means is
means for determining the content of the first effect range in the unit effect by executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S404 in the sound and light side MPU 62);
means for determining the contents of the second effect range in the unit effect by executing the second lottery process (function for executing the process of step S406 in the sound and light side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G6, by executing the first lottery process and the second lottery process and determining the performance contents of the unit performance, it is possible to irregularly determine the performance contents of the unit performance. In this case, since the configuration of the feature G1 is provided, and the content of the effect with different duration of the effect can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process is increased. be done.

For the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing effects such as display effects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (for measurement display in the display CPU 72) for controlling display of the display means so that the measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of objects to be measured (the number of acquired game balls) is displayed on the display unit a function of executing the arithmetic processing of, a function of executing the arithmetic processing for the increase display in the display CPU 72);
with
The display control means includes change value change means for changing the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when updating the measurement result information (steps S2003, S2007, S2010 and S2012 in the display CPU 72). and a function of executing the processing of steps S2102 to S2104 in the display CPU 72).

According to the feature H1, by displaying the measurement result information corresponding to the number of objects to be measured on the display section, it is possible for the player to recognize the number of objects to be measured. In this case, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information is changed when the measurement result information is updated. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means starts display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and terminates display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within the range of one measurement.

According to the feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes even within the range of one measurement. becomes possible.

Feature H3. The display control means starts display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and terminates display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs,
The game machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in each measurement.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets a value corresponding to a result of dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

According to the characteristic H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing means changes the change value according to a value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information.

According to the feature H5, by changing the change value according to the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the change value of the value of the measurement result information can be changed while being related to the value to be reflected. It is possible to change.

Feature H6. Any one of the characteristics H1 to H5, wherein the change value changing means increases the value of the change value as the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information increases. The game machine described.

According to the feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the value of the change value, thereby completing the reflection of the value to be reflected in the measurement result information. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes, while shortening the period required until.

Feature H7. The display control means is
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is divided into multiple update timings and displayed in the measurement result information. a first reflecting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 to S2013 in the display CPU 72) for reflecting the value
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to the decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing. a second reflecting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2003 and S2004 in the display CPU 72) for reflecting the
with
When the value to be reflected is divided into a plurality of update timings and reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information by the first reflection unit, the change value changing unit performs the above change at each update timing. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that the change value can be changed.

According to feature H7, when the value to be measured increases, it is possible to emphasize that the value to be measured is increasing by reflecting the value to be reflected at multiple update timings. Thus, when the value to be measured decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, so that the decrease in the value to be measured can be made inconspicuous. In this case, if the value of the object to be measured increases, the change value at each update timing may be changed. It becomes possible to diversify some aspects.

Feature H8. Any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the measurement object is a difference between an increase in the number of game media usable by the player and a decrease in the number of game media usable by the player. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature H8, when the difference between the increase and decrease in the number of game media usable by the player is displayed as the measurement result information, the manner in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. becomes possible.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group H can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Production execution means (symbol display device 41) for executing production,
Production control means (sound and light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) that controls the production execution means,
In a game machine equipped with
The production control means is a time corresponding control means (sound and light side A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S3010 and S3011 in the MPU 62).

According to the feature I1, the special effect is started when the predetermined start corresponding time comes, so that it is possible to perform the effect triggered by the predetermined time. Further, for example, it is possible to simultaneously start the same effect in a plurality of game machines installed in a game hall. In addition, it is not preferable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of facilitating the understanding of the processing load and the content of the game by starting the special effect when the start condition is satisfied when the time corresponding to the start has come. It is possible to prevent the special performance from being started under certain circumstances.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the time corresponding control means starts the special effect after a preparation period has elapsed when the start corresponding time has come.

According to the feature I2, when the start corresponding time comes, the special effect is started after the preparation period has passed, so the start time of the special effect can be set to the predetermined time. In addition, it becomes possible to distribute and execute the processing necessary for executing the special effect during the preparation period, thereby distributing the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (effect for the game round) when an arbitrary trigger that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. ~ a function to execute the processing of step S3213),
The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period longer than or equal to the longest execution period of the execution period of the arbitrary correspondence effect.

According to feature I3, the preparation period is set as a period longer than or equal to the maximum execution period of the optional corresponding performance, so that even if the start corresponding time comes in the situation where the optional corresponding performance is being executed, the special performance is started. The arbitrary correspondence performance in the middle of the execution is finished before the timing to make it come. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution status of the arbitrary correspondence performance to a predetermined situation when the special performance is started, and the occurrence of the event that the processing load at the timing when the special performance is started becomes extremely high. can be prevented.

Feature I4. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (effect for the game round) when an arbitrary trigger that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. ~ a function to execute the processing of step S3213),
When the optional response control means starts the optional response performance before the start condition is established after the start response time has come, the optional response control means limits the performance contents of the optional response performance to predetermined performance contents. The gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized by:

According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the effect content of the arbitrary corresponding effect when the special effect is started to the predetermined effect content. As a result, the phenomenon that the processing load at the timing of starting the special performance becomes extremely high while making it possible to start the optional corresponding performance after the start corresponding time and before starting the special performance. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of

Feature I5. The production control means is a preparation control means (sound and light A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processes of steps S2806, S2807, S3006 and S3007 in the side MPU 62.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special effect will be executed from now on by executing the preparation corresponding effect.

Feature I6. Characteristic feature I5, characterized in that the preparation corresponding control means does not start the preparation corresponding effect until the limiting condition is canceled when the limiting condition is satisfied when the starting corresponding time has come. game machine.

According to the feature I6, when the limiting condition is satisfied, the preparation corresponding effect is not started even if the start corresponding time comes, so that the preparation corresponding effect is started in an unfavorable situation from the viewpoint of the processing load and the like. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the preparation control means executes notification (display of remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the restriction condition when the restriction condition is satisfied.

According to feature I7, it is possible for the player to recognize that the preparation corresponding effect and the special effect will be executed from now on even in a situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (effect for the game round) when an arbitrary trigger that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. ~ a function to execute the processing of step S3213),
When the start corresponding time comes in a situation in which the arbitrary correspondence performance is being executed, the preparation correspondence control means determines that the restriction condition is satisfied, and continues the preparation correspondence performance until the arbitrary correspondence performance is completed. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, characterized in that it does not start.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to prevent the start of the preparation correspondence performance during execution of the optional correspondence performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation corresponding performance is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect execution means is display means having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a),
When the preparation corresponding effect and another effect (game round effect) are executed at the same time, the preparation corresponding effect is executed in a part of the display unit, and the other region of the display unit (section display The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein the other effect is executed in the area G66).

According to the feature I9, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize each of the preparation corresponding effect and the other effect.

Feature I10. The preparation response control means causes the effect execution means to notify, as the preparation response effect, remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9.

According to feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation corresponding control means,
The display of the remaining time information is started from the information of the predetermined initial value and the remaining time information is updated until the information of the predetermined end value is displayed regardless of the timing at which the preparation corresponding performance is started. means for continuing the (function for executing the processing of step S3404 in the display CPU 201);
means for changing the update value of the remaining time information once according to the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started (function for executing the processing of steps S3402 and S3403 in the display CPU 201);
The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I11, it is possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation corresponding production is started.

Feature I12. When a predetermined time before the start condition is satisfied at or after the start corresponding time, a predetermined The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, characterized by comprising means for starting an effect (a function of executing the processing of step S2801 in the sound and light side MPU 62).

According to the feature I12, it is possible to reliably start the predetermined effect when the corresponding start time has come. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously start a predetermined effect in a plurality of gaming machines installed in, for example, a game hall, regardless of the performance execution status of the performance executing means in the plurality of gaming machines.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I12, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to provide innovative game contents in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
Specific individual images (first pseudo-moving character G42, second pseudo-moving character G43, pseudo- First frame control means for displaying a first frame image (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) including a moving image character G51) (function of executing the processing of steps S2204 to S2207 in the display CPU 72 )When,
Using the second still image data (second character image data 173) stored in advance in the display storage means, a second frame image (second character image G48, second pseudo image) including the specific individual image is displayed. a second frame control means for displaying a moving image G53) (a function of executing the processing of steps S2217 to S2220 in the display CPU 72);
At the image update timing after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, intermediate image data (effect image data) stored in advance in the display storage means image data 172) to display an intermediate image (effect image G45, pseudo moving image effect image G54) that does not include the specific individual image (the display CPU 72 executes the processing of steps S2211 to S2214). function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, the specific individual image is displayed between the update timing when the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing when the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. Intermediate images not included are displayed. As a result, even in a situation where there is not enough image data for the player to recognize that a moving image of a specific individual image is being displayed, the specific individual image can be displayed by interposing the intermediate image. It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image display of is being performed.

Feature J2. The first frame control means displays the first frame image in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to create a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J3. The second frame control means displays the second frame image in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2.

According to feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to create a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J4. a configuration in which the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image in the specific effect period;
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific effect period and the first period.

According to feature J4, the effect of displaying the specific individual image in the specific effect period is executed using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period. be. As a result, the still image data can be shared in a plurality of situations, and the required storage capacity of the display storage means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature J1, even with the configuration that uses the first still image data and the second still image data, a moving image of a specific individual image during the specific effect period It is possible to make the player recognize that the display is being performed.

Feature J5. The predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image corresponds to a predetermined motion path (predetermined portion G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so as to be displayed at a position on the far side of the
According to any one of features J1 to J4, wherein the intermediate image data is set such that the intermediate individual image (individual image G54a) displayed in the intermediate image is displaced along the predetermined motion path. game machine.

According to the characteristic J5, the intermediate image is displayed such that the intermediate individual image is displaced according to the movement path of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the first still image data and the second still image data, thereby displaying the first still image data. Even when the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the image data is separated from the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data, the predetermined part is displaced along the predetermined motion path. It is possible to give the impression to the player that he/she is doing so.

Feature J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are actually shot images, and the intermediate image is a non-actually shot image.

According to feature J6, it is possible to give the player the impression that a specific individual image is being displayed as a moving image by using the non-actually photographed image even in a situation where there are few types of photographed images. Become.

For the configuration of any one of features J1 to J6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means is
first moving image data (first moving image data group 261 of A angle) that enables a series of specific moving images to be displayed by using image data created by executing the decoding process;
Second moving image data (A angle second moving image data group 262) of
is stored in advance.

According to the characteristic K1, since the second moving image data is provided in addition to the first moving image data, the first moving image data and the second moving image are used as the objects to be used according to the timing at which the display start trigger occurs. It is possible to select any of the data. Thus, only by switching the moving image data to be used, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image, and the display of the specific moving image can be started from the middle of the specific moving image.

Feature K2. The first moving image data includes a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) each having a different display period corresponding to the specific moving image,
The second moving image data has a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) corresponding to the specified intermediate moving image, each having a different display period,
Each of the second unit moving image data is a moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of the displayed moving image by using the first unit moving image data in the corresponding order among the plurality of first moving image data. The game machine according to feature K1, which is set as data to be displayed.

According to the feature K2, it is possible to set many timings that allow the specific moving image to be started from the middle, and it becomes easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the generation timing of the display start trigger.

Feature K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in corresponding orders, the start timing of the displayed moving image and the second unit moving image data are determined by using the first unit moving image data. The amount of deviation in image update timing from the start timing of the moving image displayed by use is the same for each combination of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in corresponding orders Or the game machine according to feature K2, which is substantially the same.

According to feature K3, it is easy to design the timing at which the display of the moving image based on the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the display of the moving image based on the second unit moving image data can be started. be done.

Feature K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data that the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature K2 or K3.

According to the characteristic K4, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to display of moving images based on the first moving image data and timings at which switching to display of moving images based on the second moving image data are possible. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data read out at one time.

Feature K5. The display control means starts displaying the specific moving image using the first moving image data when the player performs a predetermined operation at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, target switching means (step in display CPU 201) for starting display of the specific intermediate moving image using the second moving image data A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S4105 to S4117.

According to the characteristic K5, even if the predetermined operation by the player occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation.

Feature K6. The target switching means performs the predetermined operation at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific intermediate moving image. Also, if the predetermined operation is performed after the timing before the period required to start using the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second moving image data The gaming machine according to feature K5, characterized in that the display of the specified interim moving image using is not started.

According to the feature K6, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation within the range where the use of the second moving image data can be smoothly started.

Feature K7. The display control means is an object switching means (display CPU 201 in A function to execute the processing of steps S4105 to S4117),
The combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the first moving image among the plurality of types of moving images,
The display storage means is
Third moving image data (first moving image data group 264 of B angle) that enables a series of predetermined moving images to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
Fourth moving image data (B angle) that enables the display of a predetermined intermediate moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of the predetermined moving image by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. second moving image data group 265) of
is stored in advance,
The combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a second moving image among the plurality of types of moving images. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which the moving image to be displayed can be switched between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Feature K8. the first moving image data and the third moving image data match in timing at which the start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period;
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data have the same timing at which the start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

According to the characteristic K8, when switching from one of the first moving image and the second moving image to the other, it is possible to start displaying the switching destination moving image from the display content corresponding to the switching source display content.

Feature K9. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images with different angles for displaying the special individual image.

According to the feature K9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images with different angles for displaying the special individual image.

Feature K10. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means stores predetermined moving image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) that enable a series of special moving images to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. ) is stored in advance,
The predetermined moving image data has a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) with different display periods corresponding to the special moving images,
The gaming machine, wherein the special unit moving image data is data that allows the number of pieces of image data created by executing the decoding process to be the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

According to the feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to display of moving images based on predetermined moving image data is possible. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data read out at one time.

For the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group J and the characteristic group K can solve the following problems.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 41... Symbol display device 41a... Liquid crystal display part 44... Display light emission part 45... Speaker part 52... Main side MPU 62... Sound and light side MPU 72... Display CPU 74... Memory module , 76...VDP, 82a...First frame area, 82b...Second frame area, 122...Character stopping table, 123...Character moving table, 124...Background table, 125...Interlocking flag, 132...Decoded image data , 142 Band display image data 143 Lighting image data 144 Turning off image data 145 Band display table 146 Flashing display table 171 First character image data 172 Effect image Data 173 Second character image data 201 Display CPU 202 Work RAM 203 Memory module 204 VRAM 205 VDP 211 VRAM 211a Area for texture 211b Area for moving picture data , 241 --- Image data of the backmost side 242 --- Image data for the first individual background image 243 --- Image data for the second individual background image 244 --- Image data for the effect character 245 --- First separate stored image data , 246... Image data for additional individual images 247... Second separate image data 248... Effect image data 261 to 269... Moving image data group 271a to 273c... Moving image data 282... Special moving image data 284 Still image data G4 Loop display character G5 Loop display background G11 Group display character G22 Effective period image G24 Band image G25 Flashing image G31 Number display image G41 First character image G42 First pseudo moving image character G43 Second pseudo moving image character G45 Effect image G48 Second character image G51 Pseudo moving image character G51a Predetermined part G52 ... First pseudo moving image, G53 ... Second pseudo moving image, G54 ... Pseudo moving image effect image, G54a ... Individual image, G63 ... Remaining time notification image, G66 ... Section display area, T10 ... Execution for acceleration period Target table, T11: Execution target table for the first high speed period, T12: Execution target table for the first low speed period.

Claims (1)

a display means having a display;
display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means includes simultaneous display control means for simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit,
The gaming machine includes first mode determination information in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image. Information for determining the second mode set in chronological order, and information storage means for storing in advance,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and A gaming machine, wherein the display mode of the second type image is determined according to the information for determining the second mode.

Images